Kidde Pegasys 76-100016-001

July 2003 P/N 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control and Fire Alarm System
Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual

R
FM
APPROVED
Factory Mutual Approval J.I. No. OB2A6.AY
LISTED
UL Listing File No. S2422
July 2003 P/N 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control and Fire Alarm System
Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
FOREWORD
Note: This Manual Is To Be Used By Trained Distributors Only
This manual is intended to clearly and accurately reflect the PEGAsys Fire Alarm/Suppression Control System. This publication describes the operation, installation and maintenance of the PEGAsys Fire Alarm/Suppression Control System, P/Ns 76-100000-501 for Single-Loop System and 76-100000-600 for Multi-Loop System. TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS AC ADA AH AI AO AST ATM BIP BPM CCM CCP DC EDP EOC ESD FCP GUI HSSD HVAC I/O ID IRI LCD LED ML NC Alternating Current Americans with Disabilities Act Ampre Hour Addressable Contact Input Device Addressable Relay Output Device Alarm Simulation Test Annunciator Terminal Module Broadcast Indexed Protocol Beats Per Minute Central Control Module Central Control Panel Direct Current Electronic Data Processing Event Output Control Electrostatic Discharge Fire Control Panel Graphical User Interface High-Sensitivity Smoke Detector Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Input/Output Identification Industrial Risk Insurers Liquid Crystal Display Light Emitting Diode Multi-Loop Normally Closed NCCM NIC NFPA NO NR NYC P/N PALM PAS PC PCB PCS PC Line PS RCU RDCM RDM RTC RX/TX SL SLC SPDT UL V Vac Vdc Networkable Central Control Module Network Interface Card National Fire Protection Agency Normally Open Not Registered New York City Part Number PEGAsys Addressable Loop Module Positive Alarm Sequence Personal Computer Printed Circuit Board PEGAsys Configuration Software Power/Communication Line (RX/TX Loop) Power Supply Remote Control Unit Remote Display Control Module Remote Display Module Real-Time Clock Receive Transmit Single-Loop Signaling Line Circuit Single Pole, Double Throw Underwriter Laboratories Volts Voltage Alternating Current Voltage Direct Current
ACCEPTANCES, APPROVALS AND CERTIFICATIONS PEGAsys Single-Loop System (P/N 76-100000-501) UL: Underwriters Laboratories Listing File Number S2422. FM: Factory Mutual Engineering Corp. (Factory Mutual System) Approval J.I. Number 3005511 CSFM: California State Fire Marshal Listing Number 7165-1076:146. NYC: City of New York Listing Number MEA 454-91-E Vol.III. UL: Underwriters Laboratories Listing File Number S2422. FM: Factory Mutual Engineering Corp. (Factory Mutual System) Approval J.I. Number 3005511 CSFM: California State Fire Marshal Listing Number 7165-1076:146. NYC: City of New York Listing Number MEA 454-91-E Vol.III.
PEGAsys Multi-Loop System (P/N 76-100000-600)
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Foreword ................................................................................................................................... i Terms and Abbreviations ........................................................................................................... i Appendices ................................................................................................................................ vii List of Illustrations ...................................................................................................................... viii List of Tables ............................................................................................................................. x Safety Summary ........................................................................................................................ xi PARAGRAPH TITLE 1 1-1 1-1.1 1-1.2 1-2 1-2.1 1-2.2 1-2.3 1-2.4 1-2.5 1-2.6 1-2.7 1-2.7.1 1-2.7.2 1-2.7.3 1-2.7.4 1-2.8 1-2.9 1-2.10 1-2.11 1-2.12 1-2.12.1 1-2.12.2 1-2.12.3 1-2.13 1-2.14 1-2.15 1-2.16 1-2.17 1-2.18 1-2.19 1-2.20 1-3 2 2-1 2-1.1 2-2 2-2.1 2-2.2 2-3 2-3.1 2-3.2 2-3.3 2-4 2-5 2-5.1 PAGE
General Information ................................................................................................................ 1-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 1-1 System Description .................................................................................................................... 1-1 System Components ................................................................................................................. 1-1 Component Description ............................................................................................................. 1-2 Central Control Module (CCM) .................................................................................................. 1-2 Display Module .......................................................................................................................... 1-2 Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX) ...................................................................................... 1-2 Power Supply/Charger Assembly .............................................................................................. 1-2 Basic Motherboard .................................................................................................................... 1-3 Multi-Loop Motherboard ............................................................................................................ 1-3 Output Modules ......................................................................................................................... 1-3 Signal Output Module ................................................................................................................ 1-4 Relay Output Module ................................................................................................................. 1-4 Agent Release Output Module ................................................................................................... 1-4 City-Tie Module .......................................................................................................................... 1-4 Remote Display/Control Modules .............................................................................................. 1-5 ATM Series Driver Modules ....................................................................................................... 1-5 Network Interface Card ............................................................................................................. 1-5 Standby Batteries ....................................................................................................................... 1-6 Intelligent Loop Devices ............................................................................................................ 1-6 SmartOne Ionization Detector ................................................................................................... 1-6 SmartOne Photoelectric Detector .............................................................................................. 1-6 SmartOne Heat Detector ........................................................................................................... 1-6 SmartOne Detector Bases ........................................................................................................ 1-6 Addressable Contact Input Device ............................................................................................ 1-6 Addressable Relay Output Device ............................................................................................. 1-7 Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing .............................................................................................. 1-7 Loop Isolator Devices ................................................................................................................ 1-7 ORION XT Interface Module ..................................................................................................... 1-7 Addressable AlarmLine Module ................................................................................................. 1-8 Addressable Signal/Sounder Module ........................................................................................ 1-8 System Specification ................................................................................................................. 1-8 Operation ................................................................................................................................. 2-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 2-1 Modes of Operation ................................................................................................................... 2-1 Controls and Indicators .............................................................................................................. 2-1 LCD Display ............................................................................................................................... 2-1 Audible Device ........................................................................................................................... 2-3 System Security ......................................................................................................................... 2-3 Levels of Security ...................................................................................................................... 2-3 Default Passwords ..................................................................................................................... 2-3 Entering Passwords ................................................................................................................... 2-3 System Power-Up ...................................................................................................................... 2-3 System Menus ........................................................................................................................... 2-4 Menu Structure .......................................................................................................................... 2-4
iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont.)

PARAGRAPH 2-5.2 2-5.3 2-5.4 2-5.4.1 2-5.4.2 2-5.4.3 2-5.4.4 2-6 2-6.1 2-6.2 2-6.2.1 2-6.2.2 2-6.3 2-6.3.1 2-6.3.2 2-6.4 2-6.4.1 2-6.4.2 2-7 2-8 2-8.1 2-8.1.1 2-8.2 2-8.2.1 2-8.2.2 2-8.3 2-8.3.1 2-8.3.2 2-8.3.3 2-8.3.4 2-8.3.5 2-8.4 2-8.5 2-8.5.1 2-8.6 2-8.7 2-8.7.1 2-8.7.2 2-8.7.3 2-8.7.4 2-8.7.5 3 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-3.1 3-3.2 3-3.3 3-3.4 3-3.5 3-3.6 3-3.7 3-3.8 TITLE PAGE Accessing the System Menus ................................................................................................... 2-4 Exiting the System Menus ......................................................................................................... 2-4 Menu Functions ......................................................................................................................... 2-4 Isolate Menu Function ............................................................................................................... 2-4 List Menu Function .................................................................................................................... 2-7 Set Menu Function .................................................................................................................... 2-7 Test Menu Function ................................................................................................................... 2-7 Modes of Operation ................................................................................................................... 2-7 Normal Standby Mode ............................................................................................................... 2-7 Active Alarm Mode ..................................................................................................................... 2-7 Alarm Mode Indications ............................................................................................................. 2-7 Alarm Mode User Action ............................................................................................................ 2-7 Active Supervisory Mode ........................................................................................................... 2-10 Supervisory Mode Indication ..................................................................................................... 2-10 Supervisory Mode User Action .................................................................................................. 2-11 Active Trouble Mode .................................................................................................................. 2-11 Trouble Mode Indications .......................................................................................................... 2-11 Trouble Mode User Action ......................................................................................................... 2-11 Printing Operation ...................................................................................................................... 2-12 System Programming ................................................................................................................ 2-12 EOC Programming .................................................................................................................... 2-12 Listing EOC Programming ......................................................................................................... 2-12 RTC Programming .................................................................................................................... 2-12 Listing RTC Programming ......................................................................................................... 2-12 Enable/Disable RTC Program Line Numbers ............................................................................ 2-13 Types of Inputs and Outputs ...................................................................................................... 2-13 System Inputs ............................................................................................................................ 2-13 Remote Control Unit (RCU) ....................................................................................................... 2-13 RX/TX Loops ............................................................................................................................. 2-13 System Outputs ......................................................................................................................... 2-13 System Output Modules ............................................................................................................ 2-13 Addressing Output Modules ...................................................................................................... 2-13 Registering Output Module Assignments ................................................................................... 2-14 Listing Output Module Assignment ............................................................................................ 2-14 Addressing RCUs ...................................................................................................................... 2-14 Registering RCUs ...................................................................................................................... 2-15 Detector Registration ................................................................................................................. 2-15 Addressable Monitor Module Registration ................................................................................. 2-15 Remote Control Module Registration ......................................................................................... 2-16 Listing all Registered RCUs ....................................................................................................... 2-16 De-Registering RCUs ................................................................................................................ 2-16 Functional Description ............................................................................................................ 3-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 3-1 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................... 3-1 Functional Descriptions ............................................................................................................. 3-2 Central Control Module .............................................................................................................. 3-2 Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX) ...................................................................................... 3-3 Power Supply/Charger Assembly .............................................................................................. 3-4 Multi-Loop Motherboard ............................................................................................................ 3-5 Signal Output Module ................................................................................................................ 3-5 Relay Output Module ................................................................................................................. 3-6 Agent Release Output Module ................................................................................................... 3-7 City-Tie Module .......................................................................................................................... 3-7
iv

PARAGRAPH 3-3.9 3-3.10 3-3.11 3-3.12 3-3.13 3-3.14 3-3.15 3-3.16 3-3.17 3-3.18 3-3.19 3-3.20 3-3.21 3-3.22 4 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-3.1 4-3.2 4-3.3 4-3.4 4-3.4.1 4-3.4.2 4-3.5 4-3.5.1 4-4 4-4.1 4-4.2 4-5 4-5.1 4-6 4-6.1 5 5-1 5-2 5-2.1 5-2.2 5-3 5-4 5-4.1 5-4.2 5-4.3 5-4.4 6 6-1 7 7-1 7-2 TITLE PAGE Remote Display Control Modules .............................................................................................. 3-8 ATM Series Driver Modules ....................................................................................................... 3-8 Network Interface Card ............................................................................................................. 3-8 Field Devices ............................................................................................................................. 3-9 SmartOne Ionization Detector ................................................................................................... 3-9 SmartOne Photoelectric Detector .............................................................................................. 3-9 SmartOne Heat Detector ........................................................................................................... 3-9 Addressable Contact Input Device ............................................................................................ 3-9 Addressable Relay Output Device ............................................................................................. 3-10 Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing .............................................................................................. 3-10 Loop Isolator Devices ................................................................................................................ 3-10 PEGAsys Addressable Loop Module (PALM) ............................................................................ 3-11 Addressable AlarmLine Module ................................................................................................. 3-11 Addressable Signal/Sounder Module ........................................................................................ 3-12 Maintenance Procedure .......................................................................................................... 4-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 4-1 Scheduled Maintenance ............................................................................................................ 4-1 Maintenance Procedures ........................................................................................................... 4-1 Lamp Test .................................................................................................................................. 4-1 Loop Device Test ....................................................................................................................... 4-1 Battery Test ................................................................................................................................ 4-2 Walk Test ................................................................................................................................... 4-2 Walk Testing Detectors .............................................................................................................. 4-2 Walk Test Procedure ................................................................................................................. 4-2 Alarm Simulation Test (AST) ..................................................................................................... 4-3 AST Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 4-3 Disarming and Rearming Release Circuits ................................................................................ 4-3 Disarming Release Circuits ....................................................................................................... 4-4 Arming Release Circuits ............................................................................................................ 4-4 Powering Down the System ....................................................................................................... 4-4 Power-Down Procedure ............................................................................................................ 4-4 Powering Up the System ........................................................................................................... 4-4 Power-Up Procedure ................................................................................................................. 4-4 Troubleshooting and Corrective Maintenance ..................................................................... 5-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 5-1 Standard Fault-Isolation Techniques .......................................................................................... 5-1 Visual Inspection ....................................................................................................................... 5-1 Power Checks ........................................................................................................................... 5-1 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................... 5-1 Removal and Replacement ....................................................................................................... 5-2 Required Tools ........................................................................................................................... 5-2 Central Control Module .............................................................................................................. 5-2 RX/TX Module ........................................................................................................................... 5-2 Field Devices ............................................................................................................................. 5-3 Parts List .................................................................................................................................. 6-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 6-1 Installation ................................................................................................................................ 7-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 7-1 Materials Required For Installation ............................................................................................ 7-1
v

PARAGRAPH 7-3 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-7.1 7-7.2 7-7.3 7-7.4 7-7.5 7-7.6 7-7.7 7-8 7-9 7-9.1 7-9.2 7-10 7-10.1 7-11 7-12 7-13 7-14 7-14.1 7-15 7-16 7-17 7-18 7-18.1 7-18.2 TITLE PAGE Installation Procedure For Central Control Panel ...................................................................... 7-1 Installation Procedure For Expansion Enclosures ..................................................................... 7-1 Installation Procedure For Output Motherboard ........................................................................ 7-2 Installation Procedure For Rx/Tx Module (Multi-Loop Only) ...................................................... 7-2 Installation of Output Modules ................................................................................................... 7-3 Signal Audible Output Module ................................................................................................... 7-3 Relay Output Module ................................................................................................................. 7-4 Agent Release Module .............................................................................................................. 7-4 City-Tie Output Module .............................................................................................................. 7-4 Power Supply/Charger Assembly .............................................................................................. 7-4 Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Expansion Enclosure ........................................................... 7-4 Power Supply Communication Connections .............................................................................. 7-5 Connecting AC Power ............................................................................................................... 7-5 Install And Connect DC Power .................................................................................................. 7-6 Battery Enclosure ...................................................................................................................... 7-6 Batteries .................................................................................................................................... 7-6 Field Device Connection To RX/TX Module ............................................................................... 7-6 Wiring the RX/TX PC Line ......................................................................................................... 7-6 Output Signal Connection .......................................................................................................... 7-8 External Power Failure Indicator Connection ............................................................................ 7-8 Detector Installation ................................................................................................................... 7-8 Setting and Adjusting Smoke and Heat Detector Sensitivities ................................................... 7-8 Setting and Adjusting Smoke and Heat Detector Sensitivity Procedure .................................... 7-9 Addressable Contact Input Device Installation .......................................................................... 7-9 Addressable Relay Output Device Installation ........................................................................... 7-9 Installation Checkout ................................................................................................................. 7-10 Connection of Peripherals ......................................................................................................... 7-10 Connecting a Terminal or Personal Computer ........................................................................... 7-10 Connecting a Printer .................................................................................................................. 7-10
vi
LIST OF APPENDICES
APPENDIX A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O TITLE PAGE Power Supply Requirements ..................................................................................................... A-1 System Expansion ..................................................................................................................... B-1 Releasing Applications .............................................................................................................. C-1 Reserved for Future Use ........................................................................................................... D-1 Factory Mutual Sprinkler Requirements for Pre-Action and Deluge Type Sprinkler Systems .... E-1 Glossary .................................................................................................................................... F-1 Display Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ G-1 Wiring Requirements for PEGAsys Signaling Line Circuit RX/TX ............................................. H-1 System Drawings ....................................................................................................................... I-1 PEGAsys Network Interface Card ............................................................................................. J-1 Addressable Signal/Sounder Module ........................................................................................ K-1 Remote Display Control Module and Remote Display Module .................................................. L-1 Addressable AlarmLine Module ................................................................................................. M-1 Networkable Central Control Module (NCCM) ........................................................................... N-1 Central Station Operation .......................................................................................................... O-1
vii
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
FIGURE 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-8 1-9 1-10 1-11 1-12 1-13 1-14 1-15 1-16 1-17 1-18 1-19 1-20 1-21 1-22 1-23 1-24 1-25 1-26 1-27 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 3-16 TITLE PAGE PEGAsys System, Overall Diagram .......................................................................................... 1-0 Central Control Module (CCM) .................................................................................................. 1-2 Display Module Assembly .......................................................................................................... 1-2 Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX) ...................................................................................... 1-2 Power Supply/Charger Assembly .............................................................................................. 1-3 Basic Motherboard .................................................................................................................... 1-3 Multi-Loop Motherboard ............................................................................................................ 1-3 Signal Output Module ................................................................................................................ 1-4 Relay Output Module ................................................................................................................. 1-4 Agent Release Output Module ................................................................................................... 1-4 City Tie Module .......................................................................................................................... 1-4 RDCM Keypad ........................................................................................................................... 1-5 Module Mounting Dimensions ................................................................................................... 1-5 Network Interface Card ............................................................................................................. 1-5 Battery Enclosure ...................................................................................................................... 1-6 SmartOne Detection Device ...................................................................................................... 1-6 4-inch Detector Base ................................................................................................................. 1-6 6-inch Detector Base ................................................................................................................. 1-6 Addressable Contact Input Device ............................................................................................ 1-6 Addressable Relay Output Device ............................................................................................. 1-7 Air Duct Housing ........................................................................................................................ 1-7 Loop Isolator, Stand-Alone ......................................................................................................... 1-7 Loop Isolator, RX/TX Mount ...................................................................................................... 1-7 Loop Isolator, 6-inch Detector Base Mount ................................................................................ 1-7 PALM Interface Module for ORION XT HSSD ........................................................................... 1-7 Addressable AlarmLine Module ................................................................................................. 1-8 Addressable Signal/Sounder Module ........................................................................................ 1-8 System Front Panel ................................................................................................................... 2-1 Menu Structure .......................................................................................................................... 2-5 Active Alarms Example .............................................................................................................. 2-7 Supervisory Example for Supervisory Mode Indication ............................................................. 2-11 Active Troubles and Pre-Alarms Example ................................................................................. 2-11 Output Module Address Scheme ............................................................................................... 2-13 RCU Registration Screen .......................................................................................................... 2-15 Overall Block Diagram, Single-Loop System ............................................................................ 3-1 Overall Block Diagram, Multi-Loop System ............................................................................... 3-1 Central Control Module, Details ................................................................................................. 3-2 Receiver/Transmitter Module, Details ........................................................................................ 3-3 Power Supply/Charger Assembly Details .................................................................................. 3-4 Multi-Loop Motherboard, Details ................................................................................................ 3-5 Signal Output Module, Details ................................................................................................... 3-6 Relay Output Module, Details .................................................................................................... 3-7 Agent Release Output Module, Details ...................................................................................... 3-7 City Tie Module, Details ............................................................................................................. 3-8 RDCM Keypad ........................................................................................................................... 3-8 ATM Module .............................................................................................................................. 3-8 Network Interface Card ............................................................................................................. 3-8 Typical Detector ......................................................................................................................... 3-9 Addressable Contact Input Device ............................................................................................ 3-10 Addressable Relay Output Device ............................................................................................. 3-10
viii
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (cont.)

FIGURE 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-20 3-21 3-22 3-23 5-1 5-2 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-8 7-9 7-10 7-11 7-12 7-13 7-14 7-15 7-16 TITLE PAGE DH-2000 Air Duct Housing ........................................................................................................ 3-10 Loop Isolator, RX/TX Mount ...................................................................................................... 3-11 Loop Isolator, Stand-Alone ......................................................................................................... 3-11 Loop Isolator, 6-inch Detector Base Mount ................................................................................ 3-11 PALM Interface Module for ORION XT HSSD ........................................................................... 3-11 Addressable AlarmLine Module ................................................................................................. 3-11 Addressable Signal/Sounder Module ........................................................................................ 3-12 Single Loop Installation .............................................................................................................. 5-2 Multi-Loop Installation ................................................................................................................ 5-2 CCP Installation Drawing ........................................................................................................... 7-1 Back Plate, Output Motherboard and Four Power Supplies ...................................................... 7-2 Back Plate, Eight Power Supplies ............................................................................................. 7-2 Back Plate, Two Output Motherboards ...................................................................................... 7-2 Installation for Multi-Loop .......................................................................................................... 7-3 Power Supply/Charger Wiring Diagram ..................................................................................... 7-4 Power Supply/Charger Wiring Diagram for Expansion Enclosure ............................................ 7-5 RS-485 Connection ................................................................................................................... 7-5 Battery Enclosure ...................................................................................................................... 7-6 Conduit to CCP .......................................................................................................................... 7-6 Shielded Wire to CCP ............................................................................................................... 7-7 Style 4, RX/TX PC Line Connections ......................................................................................... 7-7 Style 6, RX/TX PC Line Connections ......................................................................................... 7-7 Style 6, RX/TX PC Line Connections with Loop Isolators .......................................................... 7-8 Style 7, RX/TX PC Line Connection .......................................................................................... 7-8 CCM Printer Port ....................................................................................................................... 7-10
ix
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 1-1 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 3-1 3-2 5-1 5-2 6-1 7-1 7-2 TITLE PAGE System Specifications ................................................................................................................ 1-8 Controls and Indicators .............................................................................................................. 2-2 Isolate Menu Function ............................................................................................................... 2-8 List Menu Function .................................................................................................................... 2-8 Set Menu Function .................................................................................................................... 2-9 Test Menu Functions ................................................................................................................. 2-10 Multi-Loop Motherboard Connectors ......................................................................................... 3-5 Approved Release Output Devices ............................................................................................ 3-7 Troubleshooting Index ............................................................................................................... 5-1 RX/TX Configuration Selection .................................................................................................. 5-3 PEGAsys System Parts List ...................................................................................................... 6-1 RX/TX Configuration Selection .................................................................................................. 7-3 Aux. Power Supply Module Connections to Main Power Supply/Charger Assembly ................. 7-5
SAFETY SUMMARY
Note: Installation Precautions Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability.
! WARNING
Several different sources of power can be connected to this fire alarm control panel. Disconnect all sources of power before servicing. Control unit and associated equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, modules, or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to install, service, or operate this unit until this manual is read and understood.
! CAUTION
System Reacceptance Test after Software Changes: To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA-72 (2002) Chapter 10 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. Reacceptance testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring. All components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be tested and proper system operation verified. This system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0 to 49 C and at a relative humidity of 85% (noncondensing) @ 30C. However, the useful life of the systems standby batteries and the electronic components may be adversely affected by extreme temperature and humidity variations. Therefore, it is recommended that this system and its peripherals be installed in an environment with a nominal room temperature of 60 to 80F. Like all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate erratically or can be damaged when subjected to lightning induced transients. Although no system is completely immune from lightning transients and interference, proper grounding will reduce susceptibility. The use of overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended due to the increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Applications Engineering Department if any problems are anticipated or encountered. Disconnect AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards. Failure to do so can damage circuits. Remove all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, reaming, or punching of the enclosure. When possible, make all cable entries from the sides. Before making modifications, verify that they will not interfere with battery and printed circuit board location. Do not over tighten screw terminals. Over tightening may damage threads, resulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficulty with screw terminal removal. This system contains static-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any circuits so that static charges are removed from the body. Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies removed from the control unit. Follow the instructions in the installation, operating, and programming manuals. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to the control panel and associated equipment. System operation and reliability depend upon proper installation. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM LIMITATIONS Note: While installing a fire alarm system may make lower insurance rates possible, it is not a substitute for fire insurance!
An automatic fire alarm systemtypically made up of smoke detectors, heat detectors, manual pull stations, audible warning devices, and a fire alarm control unit with remote notification capabilitycan provide early warning of a developing fire. Such a system, however, does not assure protection against property damage or loss of life resulting from a fire.
xi
Any fire alarm system may fail for a variety of reasons: Smoke detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such as in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a building. A second floor detector, for example, may not sense a first floor or basement fire. Furthermore, all types of smoke detectorsboth ionization and photoelectric typeshave sensing limitations. No type of smoke detector can sense every kind of fire caused by carelessness and safety hazards like smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches or arson. Audible warning devices such as bells may not alert people if these devices are located on the other side of closed or partly open doors or are located on another floor of a building. A fire alarm system will not operate without electrical power. If AC power fails, the system will operate from standby batteries only for a specified time. Rate-of-rise heat detectors may be subject to reduced sensitivity over time. For this reason, the rate-of-rise feature of each detector should be tested at least once per year by a qualified fire protection specialist. Auxiliary equipment used in the system may not be technically compatible with the control panel. It is essential to use only equipment listed for service with your control panel. Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premise to a central monitoring station may be out of service or temporarily disabled. The most common cause of fire alarm malfunctions, however, is inadequate maintenance. All devices and system wiring should be tested and maintained by professional fire alarm installers following written procedures supplied with each device. System inspection and testing should be scheduled monthly or as required by national and/or local fire codes. Adequate written records of all inspections should be kept. GENERAL SAFETY NOTICES Note: The following must be observed to maintain personnel safety.
The following general safety notices supplement specific warnings and cautions appearing in the manual. The safety precautions in this section must be understood and applied during operation and maintenance. This manual is to be used by trained distributors/technicians. The entire manual should be read and fully understood prior to installation. TEST EQUIPMENT Make certain test equipment is in good operating condition. Do not touch live equipment or personnel working on live equipment while holding a test meter. Some types of measuring devices should not be grounded; these devices should not be held when taking measurements. FIRST AID Any injury, no matter how slight, should never go unattended. Always obtain first aid or medical attention immediately. GENERAL PRECAUTIONS The following general safety precautions are to be observed at all times: 1. All electrical components associated with equipment shall be installed and grounded in accordance with NEC, NFPA and local regulatory requirements. 2. Special precautionary measures are essential to prevent applying power to equipment at any time maintenance work is in progress. 3. Before working on electrical equipment, use a voltmeter to ensure that the system is not energized. 4. When working near electricity, do not use metal rulers, flashlights, metallic pencils or any other objects having exposed conductive material. 5. When connecting a meter to terminals for measurement, use voltage range higher than the expected voltage.
xii
January 2002
PEGAsys
FIRE ALARM
FIRE ALARM
Alarm Notification Appliances
1-0
PUSH PULL
RS-485
PUSH / HOLD
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM ABORT
76-100016-001
Addressable Suppression System Abort Device

Figure 1-1. PEGAsys System, Overall Diagram
PEGAsys
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

have Version 60.0, or higher, operating firmware. Pre-networked systems are not covered in this manual. Networkable systems have a modified CCM that can accept a Network Interface Card (NIC) for peer-to-peer control unit operations, and can accommodate Remote Display Modules (RDMs), Remote Display Control Modules (RDCMs) and ATM Series Driver Modules (ATM-L/R). Networkable systems have CCM Version 7X.X firmware. Networkable systems that are directly-integrable with ORION XT HSSDs have Version 8X.X CCM firmware. 1-1.2 System Components
1-1
INTRODUCTION
This manual contains the operation, maintenance, troubleshooting, parts listing and installation information necessary to support the PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control and Fire Alarm System. Note: This manual is to be used by trained distributors only. The entire manual should be read and fully understood prior to installation. Refer to Figure 11 for the PEGAsys System overall diagram. System Description
1-1.1
PEGAsys is a fire alarm/suppression control system which can be used for local, auxiliary, remote protective signaling and releasing device service. The system is a microprocessor based design for use with intelligent detectors and loop devices. The system utilizes distributed intelligent field devices. These devices are typically smoke detectors, contact input devices, relay outputs and signal output modules which represent a single fire alarm initiation/indicating zone. Each device contains its own data transceiver, micro controller, 4K of memory and applicable algorithms which allows each device to operate independently of the control system. These unique devices have the ability to analyze information, make decisions and store information within themselves. They communicate with the PEGAsys system using the BIP protocol which utilizes a two-wire (Style 4), four wire (Style 6) or isolated (Style 7) multiplex trunk. The PEGAsys can support up to 255 device addresses per loop, with a maximum of eight (8) loops, for a total of 2,040 intelligent device points per system. The PEGAsys is capable of controlling a wide variety of auxiliary devices, such as relays, audible/visual indicating signal devices and agent/sprinkler release systems. The system also supports the use of serial printers which provide hard copy of system status information. There are three versions of the PEGAsys currently in service. These three versions are identified as: Pre-Network, Networkable, and Networkable and directly-integrable with ORION XT High-Sensitivity Smoke Detectors (HSSDs).
The system is comprised of three major components, as shown in Figure 1-1: the Central Control Panel (CCP) which communicates with the field devices and drives output devices such as alarm signals that communicate with central stations and various types of control equipment; a display panel located on the CCP that provides system status LEDs and Control Switches; and an 80-character LCD that provides alphanumeric display of system status information. The single-loop PEGAsys Central Control Panel (P/N 76-100000-501) consists of the Central Control Module (CCM) assembly, one receiver/transmitter (RX/TX) module and one power supply assembly. Optionally the system can add a motherboard assembly which allows for the installation of optional output modules. An auxiliary power supply module can be added which increases the base system power supply capacity to 8.0 Amps at 24 Vdc. In multi-loop form, the PEGAsys ML panel (P/N 76-100000600) consists of a CCM, one (1) power-supply assembly, one (1) RX/TX module and one (1) multi-loop motherboard mounted in the enclosure. The unique multi-loop motherboard provides the ability to connect up to eight (8) RX/TX modules to the system which allows for a full 2,040 addressable points to be connected to the PEGAsys ML system. Auxiliary enclosures are available to allow the system to be expanded. The auxiliary enclosure has the same dimensions as that of the main enclosure, with the absence of the window in the door. There are optional backplanes that install in the expansion enclosure. This allows the number of output modules and system power supplies to be expanded. To allow for maximum system flexibility and expansion, enclosure(s) and backplane(s) can be added to the system. See Appendix B for further system expansion details.
Pre-networked systems have operating firmware in the Central Control Module (CCM) that ranged from Version 48.0 to Version 6X.X. All pre-networked systems must now
76-100016-001
1-1
July 2003
PEGAsys
1-2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY
The following paragraphs give a brief description of each component used in the PEGAsys system. For functional descriptions of each component, see Chapter 3 of this manual. 1-2.1 Central Control Module (CCM)
AC POWER ALARM PRE-ALARM
SYSTEM TROUBLE SUPERVISORY SILENCE
SYSTEM ACKNOWLEDGE SYSTEM RESET
SILENCE SCROLL
The CCM assembly is the heart of the system and is comprised of two (2) printed circuit board (PCB) assemblies, the display module and the main processor module. The CCM controls the operation and supervision of all the system modules and software within the PEGAsys system. It receives loop device data from the RX/TX module, processes the data based on pre-programmed instructions and transmits output commands to the output modules, field devices and display module(s). 1-2.2 Display Module
Figure 1-3. Display Module Assembly 1-2.3 Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX)
The display module assembly, attached to the main processor PCB, provides the system with the operator interface for control switches, system status LEDs, system trouble/alarm buzzer, an 80-character (2 x 40) LCD display and an integral numeric keypad. The keypad is used for entering the security password and navigating through the user menus. The system buzzer provides two (2) distinctly different signaling patterns for audible warning of system alarms and troubles.
The RX/TX functions as the hardware and software interface between the field devices and the CCM. The RX/TX receives control requests from the CCM, and establishes communications with the field devices. The RX/TX receives status changes from the field devices and reports these changes to the CCM. The RX/TX, shown in Figure 1-4, is capable of communicating with up to 255 intelligent devices and complies with the wiring requirements of NFPA Style 4, 6 and 7 (with the use of the loop isolator devices). Style 4 initiation circuit wiring will permit T tapping or branch circuitry. 1-2.4 Power Supply/Charger Assembly
The power supply/charger assembly (P/N 76-100009-010) is comprised of a PCB assembly and an AC/DC switching power supply unit. The switching power supply unit provides 4 Amps of 24 Vdc from the 120/240 Vac input power. The PCB assembly is a microprocessor based unit which provides the system with: Battery charging and supervision AC power supervision 24 Vdc supervision Battery load test 24 Vdc ground fault detection (+/-) Auxiliary 24 Vdc outputs
SILENCE SCROLL
Processor Port
PLG2
Display Reset Switch
Display Trouble LED

BUZZER
PLG3
SW1
EARTH FAULT
SUPPLY FAULT
PRINT PORT
DS1
PLG2
PLG1
0V
24 VDC
Display Port
Loop Isolator for Style 7

24 Vdc from Power Supply
JK2
JK3
PC Port
Figure 1-2. Central Control Module (CCM)
TB6
JK1
Figure 1-4. Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX)

July 2003 1-2 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
combinations of RX/TX and output modules that can be used with a Multi-Loop Motherboard are as follows:
No. of RX/TX(s) 1 or 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No. of Output Modules 17 16 15 14 13 12 1

JP10
RS-232
TB11
RET +24V
TB8
TB7
TB6
TB5
TB4
TB3
TB2
TB1
RS-485
JP9
Figure 1-5. Power Supply/Charger Assembly 1-2.5 Basic Motherboard

J1
W1
TB10
JP8
JP7
JP6
JP5
JP4
JP3
JP2
JP1
COM TBL COM ALM SIG GND 485A 485B
RET
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
+24V
TB9
The basic motherboard assembly (P/N 76-100007-001) is an assembly which can accept up to eight (8) output module circuit board assemblies. The motherboard is mounted to the back of the system enclosure and/or the auxiliary enclosures. It distributes 24 Vdc power and bus communications to the output modules. The bus communications are provided by an RJ-12 (flat phone cable) style connection. The 24 Vdc is provided by the system power supply via a two-conductor wiring harness. The motherboard mounts to standoffs on the back of the main and expansion enclosures with screws which are provided.
J9
RS-485
Figure 1-7. Multi-Loop Motherboard 1-2.7 Output Modules
The optional output modules allow the PEGAsys system to interface with external auxiliary devices. These auxiliary devices can be audible/visual signal devices, HVAC systems, elevator recall, power shut down, remote annunciators, agent/sprinkler release system and any other control type output which may need to be interfaced to the system. The output modules plug into the motherboard assembly located on the backplate of the system enclosure. Each module occupies one slot in a motherboard assembly. The modules and the CCM communicate over the RS-485 based bus, which uses a six-conductor, phone-type cable to connect the CCM to the motherboard. The PEGAsys single-loop panel has the ability to support a maximum of sixteen (16) output modules, in any combination. However, no more than eight (8) of any one type of module can be used. The system is limited to one City-Tie Module. The PEGAsys multi-loop panel has the ability to support a maximum of twenty-three (23) output modules, in any combination in the system. However, no more than eight (8) of any one type of module can be used, and the system is limited to one City-Tie Module. The following paragraphs describe each available output module in greater detail.
TB2 R1 W1
COM TBL COM ALM SIG GND 485A 485B RET
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
+24V
TB1
Figure 1-6. Basic Motherboard 1-2.6 Multi-Loop Motherboard
The multi-loop motherboard assembly (P/N 76-100017001) is an assembly which can accept up to eight (8) RX/TX modules and provide connections for up to seven (7) output module circuit board assemblies. The ML motherboard is mounted to standoffs on the back of the main system enclosure. It distributes 24 Vdc power, CCMRX/TX communications for up to eight (8) RX/TX modules and bus communications to the output modules. The bus communications are provided by an RJ-12 (flat phone cable) style connection. A single RJ-12 connection connects the ML motherboard to the CCM for RX/TX communications. The 24 Vdc is provided by the system power supply via a two-conductor wiring harness. The allowable
76-100016-001 1-3
July 2003
PEGAsys
1-2.7.1 SIGNAL OUTPUT MODULE 1-2.7.3 AGENT RELEASE OUTPUT MODULE
The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of eight (8) Alarm Sounder/Signal Output cards, thus providing thirty-two (32) possible Class B, Style "Y" signal circuits. Each Alarm Sounder/Signal Output card is equipped with supervised 24 Vdc outputs which can operate as Class B, Style Y or Class A, Style Z indicating circuits (see Figure 1-8).
The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of eight (8) agent release output modules, providing up to eight (8) release circuits and twenty-four (24) signal outputs on those modules.
Figure 1-8. Signal Output Module 1-2.7.2 RELAY OUTPUT MODULE
The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of eight (8) Auxiliary Relay Output cards, allowing up to thirtytwo (32) relays. Each Auxiliary Relay Output card is equipped with four (4) Form C, dry-contact relay outputs. The ability to isolate an individual relay output is provided through the system operator menu.
76-100003-001
Figure 1-10. Agent Release Output Module 1-2.7.4 CITY-TIE MODULE
The City-Tie (Notification) Module will provide connection and operation for local energy or shunt type master boxes and reverse polarity styles of off-premises reporting.
76-100002-001
Figure 1-11. City Tie Module
Figure 1-9. Relay Output Module

July 2003 1-4 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
1-2.8 Remote Display/Control Modules
Out B Out A In B In A S2 S1
LK16 LK17 LK32
The remote display control modules permit system events to be displayed, and operator intervention to be accomplished, from more than one location in a facility. Two styles of remote display modules are available; Model RDCM is a duplicate of the PEGAsys Display/Control Module and allows full operator intervention and system control, while Model RDM is a display-only module that only permits the viewing of the current system events.
ATM-L/R
W1
LK15
LK14
LK12
4.625 5.000
+24 V Com PS Flt Earth Gnd A B Trouble Sup. Sil. Out Pre Alm Alarm Pwr On Lamp Test Com Ack Reset Silence Drill
LK10
LK8
LK6
LK4
16 15 LK13 14 13 12 LK11 11 10 9 LK9 8 7 LK7 6 5 4 LK5 3 2 LK3 1

LK1
LK31
LK29
LK27
LK25
LK23
LK21
32 31 30 LK28 29 28 27 LK26 26 25 LK24 24 23 22 LK22 21 20 LK20 19 18 17

LK30 LK18
LK19 LK2
0.188 1.375
5.175 8.000
System Status Display
SYSTEM TROUBLE SUPERVISORY SILENCE 1
SYSTEM ACKNOWLEDGE SYSTEM RESET 2 3 4
SILENCE
Note:
Maintain a minumum one-half (1/2) inch clearance around ATM-L and ATM-R Modules when installed in mounting enclosure.
SCROLL
Figure 1-13. Module Mounting Dimensions 1-2.10 Network Interface Card
Figure 1-12. RDCM Keypad 1-2.9 ATM Series Driver Modules
The ATM Series Driver Modules permit third-party graphical annunciators and large numbers of auxiliary relays to be used with the PEGAsys Control Unit. Two types of driver modules can be used, Models ATM-L and ATM-R. The Model ATM-L Annunciator Driver Module provides the PEGAsys Control Unit with up to 32 programmable, supervised LED outputs for graphical or tabular annunciators, along with 6 system-level LED outputs and 5 system-level input circuits for functional switches. The system-level LEDs correspond to the following general conditions: Module Power, Alarm, Pre-Alarm, Alarm Silence, Supervisory, and Trouble. The input circuits for functional switches provide for the following operator intervention: System Reset, Event Acknowledgment, Alarm Silence, Fire Drill, and Lamp Test.
The Network Interface Card allows multiple PEGAsys Control Units to be combined into an integrated, peer-topeer network for annunciation, event output control, and operator intervention.
NETWORK INTERFACE CARD CAT. NO. 74-200036-001
J1 DS4 DS2 DS3 DS1
B2NA2 B1NA1 B2IA2
B1IA1
N2 C26
N1
I2
I1
1 U12
CR3
TB4 CR2
TB2 K2
TB3 CR1 K3
TB1 K1
C27 1 U13 U11 C12 U2 1 R10 C13 Y1 GND +5 TP1 TP2 I1 TP3 TP4 TP5 1 U3 C14 U4 C16 1 1 R12 U16 U17 1 U8 1 R26 R28 R27 C17 1 1 R31 C15 R38 C24 C22 R32 U10 C25
C1
RV12
RV11
R23
K4
RV10
R46 R45 RV6 RV4 RV5 RV8 RV9 RV7 RV2 RV3
E1
C20
C23
R24
RV1
E8
+
R25 R6 R5 R4 R3 E7 E3 E6 E5 E4 E2
N1 N2 I2
1
R14 C2
C3
U7
C4
R22 R20 R41 U18 1

R2
C5 R36 1
R21
TP6
C18
R43
C10
C9
1 C8 R7
R1 U15
U9
R34
The PEGAsys supports up to 16 ATM-L or ATM-R Driver Modules, or any combination of these two modules, along with RDCMs and RDMs, that does not exceed 31 total addresses.
Q4 Q3
R42
Q1 1 Q2 1 U6 R18 ASHLAND, MA 01721 C7
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
Figure 1-14. Network Interface Card
76-100016-001
1-5
July 2003
R33
R15
The Model ATM-R Relay Driver Module can activate up to 32 programmable, supervised relays.
R40 U20 1 U19 1 U21 R44 U14 R17
1 R19 R29
R13
U5
C11
PEGAsys
1-2.11 Standby Batteries 1-2.13 SmartOne Detector Bases
Space is provided within the central control panel enclosure for up to two (2) 12 V, 33 AH, sealed lead-acid batteries used for 24-, 60- or 90-hour standby operation. If additional batteries are required, an optional battery enclosure is available. The enclosure (Figure 1-15) is a heavy duty steel cabinet that can house up to two (2) 40 AH batteries. For installation information, see Paragraph 7-9.1.
The SmartOne series of detection devices use universal mounting bases which are available in three styles: 1. The 4SB is a sub-floor style 4-inch base with an outside diameter that matches that of the low profile SmartOne detectors. The 4SB, shown in Figure 1-17, mounts to standard 3 inch/3.5-inch, or 100mm electrical boxes.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM STANDBY BATTERIES
KIDDE
Figure 1-15. Battery Enclosure 1-2.12 Intelligent Loop Devices Figure 1-17. 4-inch Detector Base 2. The 6SB model, shown in Figure 1-18, is a traditionally styled detector base with an integral trim ring which provides coverage for any inconsistencies between the electrical box and ceiling material. The 6SB mounts to standard 3 inch/3.5 inch/4-inch electrical boxes.
The SmartOne Series of Intelligent Fire Alarm Devices provides the PEGAsys control system with smoke and heat detection, and necessary monitoring and control functions required by advanced fire alarm systems. The following paragraphs describe each available intelligent detection device.
Figure 1-16. SmartOne Detection Device 1-2.12.1 SMARTONE IONIZATION DETECTOR 1-2.14 Figure 1-18. 6-inch Detector Base Addressable Contact Input Device
The SmartOne Ionization smoke detector provides true distributed-intelligence, addressable microprocessor-based smoke detection to the PEGAsys system. 1-2.12.2 SMARTONE PHOTOELECTRIC DETECTOR
The SmartOne Photoelectric smoke detector provides true distributed-intelligence, addressable microprocessorbased smoke detection to the PEGAsys system. 1-2.12.3 SMARTONE HEAT DETECTOR
The SmartOne Contact Monitor (P/N 70-407008-00X) allows an installer the ability to interface typical NO/NC fire alarm devices (i.e., water flow and tamper switches) to the PEGAsys system. The contact monitor is also used to interface to manual alarm, manual release and abort stations.
Figure 1-19. Addressable Contact Input Device
July 2003
1-6
ALL TERMINALS ARE POWER LIMITED
MODEL AI, N/O CAT. NO. 70-407008-001 SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 06-235578-001 MAX. INSTALL. TEMP. 120F FOR SERVICE SEND TO: KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. 400 MAIN ST. ASHLAND, MA 01721 DATE OF MANUFACTURE:
SmartOne TM
PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED (+) (-) (+) (-) A B (+) (-)
The SmartOne Thermistor heat detector provides true distributed-intelligence, addressable, microprocessor-based heat detection to the PEGAsys system.
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
SHORT-1 SHORT-2 J1 DS2 DS1
R
1-2.15
Addressable Relay Output Device
The addressable relay output device (P/N 70-408004-001) provides the PEGAsys system with a Form C dry-contact interface for remote control applications.
LED
LOOP ISOLATOR RX/TX
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

LISTED
TERMINALS 1-4 ARE POWER LIMITED TERMINALS 5-7 ARE POWER LIMITED
REFER TO INSTALLATION MANUAL P/N 76-100016-001 FOR MODULE INSTALL. PROCEDURES
MODEL AO CAT. NO. 70-408004-001 SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 06-235577-001 MAX. INSTALL. TEMP. 120F FOR SERVICE SEND TO: KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. 400 MAIN ST. ASHLAND, MA 01721 DATE OF MANUFACTURE:
SmartOne
TM
Figure 1-20. Addressable Relay Output Device 1-2.16 Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing
R
The DH-2000 air duct housing is designed for detecting particles of combustion products in air-handling systems.
Figure 1-21. Air Duct Housing 1-2.17 Loop Isolator Devices
The SmartOne series of loop isolation devices, shown in Figures 1-22 through 1-24, offer optional loop isolation which protects the loop from wire-to-wire short conditions (NFPA Style 7.0).
Figure 1-22. Loop Isolator, Stand-Alone
76-100016-001
PC PC PC PC (+) (-) (+) (-)

DUCT DETECTOR MODEL DH-2000
R
N/C
COM
N/O
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
ASHLAND, MA 01721
Figure 1-23. Loop Isolator, RX/TX Mount
Underwriters Laboratories
LISTED
Figure 1-24. Loop Isolator, 6-inch Detector Base Mount 1-2.18 ORION XT Interface Module
The PEGAsys Addressable Loop Module (PALM) permits direct connection of an ORION XT High-Sensitivity Smoke Detector (HSSD) to a signaling line circuit of the PEGAsys Control Unit. The ORION XT reports pre-alarm, alarm and trouble status by individual location (i.e., address) to the PEGAsys Control Unit via the PALM. The PALM is housed within the ORION XT HSSD enclosure and plugs into a receptacle on the Detector's printed circuit board.
Figure 1-25. PALM Interface Module for ORION XT HSSD
1-7
July 2003
PEGAsys
1-2.19 Addressable AlarmLine Module Table 1-1. System Specifications
ITEM Pow er Supply *Power Requirement: P.S. Input (Per Module) P.S. Output (Per Module) Bat. Charger Output:
TM
The Addressable AlarmLine Module (AAM) permits an AlarmLine sensor cable to be directly interfaced to the PEGAsys Control Unit. The AAM transmits pre-alarm, alarm, and trouble signals to the Central Control Module via the RX/TXs signaling line circuit. Alternatively, the AAM can be configured to transmit an overheat signal to the Control Unit for those applications that require excessivelyhigh temperature indications.
CHARACTERISTICS
120/220 V, 50/60 Hz 120 Vac, 1.9 Amps 220 Vac, .95 Amps 24 Vdc, 4 Amps 26.4 Vdc, 3 Amps 24 Vdc, 1.5 Amps each
Aux. Outputs: (2) CCM Signal Output: Release Output: Relay Contact Rating: Trouble Relay Rating:
24 Vdc, 2 Amps 24 Vdc, 2 Amps 1 Amp @ 30 Vdc 1 Amp @ 30 Vdc
Figure 1-26. Addressable AlarmLine Module 1-2.20 Addressable Signal/Sounder Module
RX/TX Module Max. Voltage: Min. Voltage: Max. Line Capacitance: Max. Line Resistance: Max. Addressable Devices: Release Module Release Output 2 Amps @ 24 Vdc 2 Amps @ 24 Vdc each Capable of releasing solenoids (suppression and sprinkler) 26.4 Vdc 19.0 Vdc 0.25 uF 26 Ohms 255 per RX/TX
The Addressable Signal/Sounder Module (ASM) permits notification appliances to be controlled via commands issued from the PEGAsys Control Units signaling line circuit. The ASM is designed to mount in a standard electrical box.
AUXILIARY MODE P1=2&3 S1=1&2 ON KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721 U.S.A. CAT. NO. 70-200200-001 INSTRUCTIONS P/N 06-235717-001 PC LINE TERMINALS - POWER LIMITED ALL OTHERS - POWER LIMITED DEVICE ADDRESS # _ _ _ _
PC LINE
TM
AUX./AUDIO MODE SETTINGS
Signal Output
UL
R
ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL/SOUNDER MODULE (ASM)

AUX. IN TROUBLE CKT. OUTPUT CKT.
+ AUDIO MODE P1=1&2 S1=3 ON
+ -
+ -
Release Output Type: Signal Audible Module Signal Outputs: Relay Module Contact Rating: City Tie Module Shunt Contact: Local Energy Output: Local Energy Supervisory: Local Energy Load:
FM
APPROVED
Figure 1-27. Addressable Signal/Sounder Module 1-3 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION
(4) Class B, Style "Y" or (2) Class A Style "Z" 2 Amps @ 24 Vdc each
System power specifications are outlined in Table 1-1.
(4) Form C Contacts, 2 Amps @ 30 Vdc or 1 Amp @ 120 Vac
5 Amps @ 24 Vdc, Resistive 500 mA max. @ 24 Vdc, Current Limited 11 mA Master Box Trip Current 0.25 Amps typical
*Note: Refer to Appendix A for total system power and AC branch circuit requirements.
July 2003
1-8
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
CHAPTER 2 OPERATION
2-1 INTRODUCTION When an alarm returns to a normal state (alarm off), the buzzer will sound in a pulsed fashion. The "alarm off" condition must be acknowledged to silence the buzzer. During the "alarm off" condition, the audible device provides no sound. The following summarizes the buzzer operation: Alarm condition is indicated by a continuous ON signal, Alarm OFF is indicated by a -second ON -second OFF signal, and Trouble condition is indicated by a 1 second ON, and 1 second OFF continuous beeping.
This chapter describes the PEGAsys system controls and indicators located on the display panel. It also describes the operating procedures and menu system. 2-1.1 Modes of Operation
There are two modes of PEGAsys system operation: 1. In the default operation, the panel will be set to latch all alarm inputs in the system. The latching operation will not allow the loop input devices to generate an "alarm off" signal that would possibly interrupt a discharge time delay sequence. To return the panel to normal, the "RESET" button will need to be pushed. 2. The second mode of operation is non-latching. This option can be enabled using the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) to define if a loop device input is to be non-latching. The non-latching operation will allow the loop input devices to generate an "alarm off" signal to the panel. When this signal is received, the panel would interrupt the discharge time delay sequence of operation. However, all outputs that had been activated previous to the "alarm off" signal will remain on and latched until the panel is reset. The advantage of offering latching or non-latching operation per loop input device is that it allows the installer/designer to customize the system. This allows the intermixing of latching and non-latching devices to protect critical areas where both types may be specified.
Every individual change of status must be individually acknowledged by pressing the <ACKLDGE> (acknowledge) button to silence the Audible device. 2-2 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
The control and indicators of the PEGAsys system are located on the display panel, shown in Figure 2-1. The display panel is mounted on top of the CCM. To gain access to the CCM, the panel door must be open. Table 2-1 lists controls and indicators for the display unit, listing name and functional description. 2-2.1 LCD Display
The display panel contains an 80-character (2 x 40) alphanumeric display. This LCD display is used to present system status. In the procedure section of this chapter there are several simulated LCD display readouts. The LCD display readouts will be used to aid users in the operation of the system.
SILENCE SCROLL
Figure 2-1. System Front Panel

76-100016-001 2-1 July 2003
PEGAsys
Table 2-1. Controls and Indicators
LE D FUNCTION When illuminated, indicates that the system is receiving AC input power. When off, indicates an AC input power failure has occurred (trouble condition) and the system has switched to a battery standby condition. When illuminated, indicates an alarm condition has been reported by an input device. When illuminated, indicates a smoke or heat detector or an HSSD has sensed a level of smoke or heat which exceeds its pre-alarm setpoint. When illuminated, indicates a trouble condition exists in the system. When illuminated, indicates a supervisory condition has been reported by a system-input device programmed for supervisory input. When illuminated, indicates the signal/audible outputs have been silenced. SWITCH FUNCTION When pressed after an alarm ON (alarm OFF if input device is set for non-latching) trouble, supervisory, or pre-alarm ON condition has occured, it silences the control unit's audible buzzer. The "ALARM", "TROUBLE", "SUPERVISORY", or "PRE-ALARM" LED indicator glows steady to indicate that the condition has been acknowledged. Subsequent conditions will cause the control unit to resound the above sequence. When pressed after all active alarms have been acknowledged and cleared, the system: Resets auxiliary 24 Vdc outputs used to power 4 wire detectors Resets all latched alarm conditions. Returns all relays to their normal state. Displays "System Reset" on the visual display. Turns the "ALARM" indicator off. The reset button must be pressed once to reset 4-wire smoke and HSSD detectors and once to reset the Control Unit When pressed after acknowledging current alarm, it silences the system signal outputs which have been programmed as silenceable. The "SILENCE" indicator illuminates to indicate that the signal outputs have been silenced. Pressing the "SILENCE" switch does not affect the relay output status. When pressed during an active alarm, trouble, or supervisory condition, will cause the LCD to scroll through the active event buffer(s). An alarm condition will not allow supervisory or troubles to be viewed. Supervisory condition will not allow the troubles buffer to be viewed. Use to enter password and system information into the menu system. Use to exit the menu system and to correct wrong entries. Used as the Enter key when using the menu system.
AC POWER ALARM PRE-ALARM SYSTEM TROUBLE SUPERVISORY SILENCE
SYSTEM ACKNOWLEDGE
SYSTEM RESET
SILENCE
SCROLL NUMERIC KEYPAD (1-0) BACKSPACE RETURN
July 2003
2-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
2-2.2 Audible Device 3. Type in three or four digit password into keypad. Ensure a pound sign (#) appears for each key pressed. Note: Use the default password if a new password has not been set. 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2-4 2:LIST 4:TEST
The Display Panel also contains an audible device which generates two separate audible tones: one for alarms and one for all other events. This device sounds continuously when a new alarm condition is received until the condition is acknowledged. It also sounds intermittently when a trouble, supervisory or pre-alarm condition is received until the condition is acknowledged. 2-3 SYSTEM SECURITY
4. Press the return () key. Verify that the display reads:
SYSTEM POWER-UP
The PEGAsys system provides three distinct levels of program protection, as required by UL Standard 864. The user can only access the system by entering a valid password. Typical valid passwords consist of three or four characters, but may be up to eight characters in length. 2-3.1 Levels of Security
The following step-by-step procedure is for initial powerup of the CCP. 1. Perform the installation checkout procedure in Chapter 7 of this manual. 2. Set the circuit breaker for the CCP power to ON. Verify that the display reads "Main Processor Power On". Ensure that the audible device is buzzing continuously. 3. Press the display module reset switch. Verify that the audible device is silenced. 4. Verify that the display reads as follows: MAIN PROCESSOR POWER ON 5. After ten seconds, verify that the display reads as follows: RXTX NON-MONITORING TROUBLE ON RXTX1 Note: For multi-loop systems only. The above and below RX/TX messages will repeat themselves for each RX/TX module installed in the system. The above message will be displayed while the system is initializing itself. This initialization can take up to 90 seconds. To clear the below RX/TX message, use the AutoLearn function from the menu function or upload the configuration from the PCS program. If using PCS software, verify that the correct number of RX/TX loops is enabled in the Loops Topic of the configuration file prior to uploading. RX/TX 1 NOT REGISTERED ON RX/TX LOOP 1 6. Verify that the POWER ON and TROUBLE indicators are lit. 7. Connect the backup batteries to the power supply in accordance with the procedure in Chapter 7. 8. Press the <ACKLDGE> button. After approximately one minute the display will momentarily read: RXTX NON-MONITORING TROUBLE OFF 9. Verify the display reads the incorrect time and date. 10. Set time and date as follows: a. Press zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
The three security levels are: Level One (system owner), Level Two (system installer) and System Manufacturer (the highest security levelreserved for the system manufacturer). Passwords consist of numeric characters (0-9) and allow access to the system from the integral keypad of the CCM. Passwords help to lock out any possible entry to the menus through the CCM keypad. Alphanumeric characters can only be used with the PCS program. However, they will lock out any possible entry to the menus from the keypad if used. If alphanumeric passwords are necessary for a particular application, it is recommended that the Level One password be numeric and the Level Two password be alphanumeric so as to allow the user to retrieve system information (system information lists) and also prevent a user from changing any programmed system parameters. 2-3.2 Default Passwords
The PEGAsys system provides protection from unauthorized entry to the system menus by utilizing two levels of default passwords: Level One and Level Two. This feature provides two separate passwords, which increase the security of the system. Default passwords are set when the system is shipped from Kidde. These default passwords are: Level One = 987 Level Two = 1865
These default passwords are valid until other passwords are programmed into the system. 2-3.3 Entering Passwords
The password entry procedure is listed below: 1. Verify that the system status is displayed. 2. Press zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
76-100016-001
2-3
July 2003
PEGAsys
b. Type in the default Level One password (987). c. Press the return () key. Verify that the display reads: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST The main menu for the Level One, Level Two and Manufacturer security level is: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST
d. Type in 3111 on the keypad. Verify that the display reads: SYSTEM TIME (AM/PM) ENTER THE TIME _ _ : _ _ (HH:MM) e. Type in the time (HH=hours 0-12 and then MM=minutes 0-59). Press the return () key. Verify that the display reads: SYSTEM TIME (AM/PM) 1:AM 2:PM f. Type in appropriate selection (1 for AM or 2 for PM).
Any one of the basic functions listed in a main menu can be selected by pressing the numeric key of the systems keypad, which corresponds to the desired function (e.g., to select the LIST function from the main menu, press the number two (2) key on the system keypad). Lower level functions may also be selected from sub-level menus using the numeric keys. 2-5.2 Accessing the System Menus
Perform the steps in Paragraph 2-3.3. 2-5.3 Exiting the System Menus
To exit the system's menus, perform the following steps: 1. Press the backspace key as many times necessary to reach the top level menu, shown below: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST
g. When the date menu appears, set the date using the same procedure as for time setting, described in steps d and e above. Note: If there has been a mistake in the entered data, press the backspace key as many times as required to return to the incorrect data, then re-enter data from that point.
2. Press the backspace key. Verify that the system returns to standby. The display should read: SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL HH:MM MM-DD-YR 40 CHARACTER CUSTOM MESSAGE Note: When exiting the system menus, if the system is normal the display panel should show the time and date as shown in the above step. Menu Functions
11. The power-up procedure is complete at this point. The system is now ready for loop device registration and programming which is covered in this chapter. 2-5 SYSTEM MENUS
2-5.4
PEGAsys has a built-in menu structure. This menu structure has been implemented to aid users with system operating functions. The following paragraphs describe the menu structure, accessing the menu, exiting the menu and menu functions. Figure 2-1 shows the system menu structure. 2-5.1 Menu Structure
The PEGAsys menu structure consists of a main menu and multiple sub-level menus. The sub-level menus may also contain multiple sub-level menus. The main menu displays after a valid password is entered. The top level menu can be accessed from any sub-level menu almost anytime by pressing the backspace key located on the keypad. Note: The top level menu may not be available by using the backspace key while certain types of programming are being performed.
Tables 2-2 through 2-5 list and provide a brief description of typical functions that can be performed using the PEGAsys systems menus. In addition, the tables provide the security access levels and a keystroke formula for each function. The keystroke formula is a sequence of numbers that is entered via the system keypad to access a particular function. These formulas provide the path from the main menu to the desired function. Formulas are provided for each access level. After the formula is entered, some of the functions require the return key to be pressed to start implementing the function. Most functions will require additional data to be entered to implement the function, such as a device address or desired alarm threshold. 2-5.4.1 ISOLATE MENU FUNCTION
It is possible to access a previous, higher level menu from a lower level menu by pressing the backspace key. The choices of available sub menus after a valid password has been entered correspond to the security level password that has been entered.
July 2003 2-4
The isolate menu function (Table 2-2) permits the operator to isolate field devices and output modules. Isolating any device immediately places the system in a trouble condition and initiates an audible trouble alarm and a printout with the time, date and device isolated. The feature is typically used to temporarily isolate auxiliary devices during a system test.
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
PLACE FOLDOUT SHEET HERE
Figure 2-2. Menu Structure
76-100016-001
2-5
July 2003
PEGAsys
BLANK FOR FOLDOUT SHEET
July 2003
2-6
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
2-5.4.2 LIST MENU FUNCTION 2-6.2 Active Alarm Mode
The list menu function (Table 2-3) permits the operator to list various system parameters. All lists are real-time actual system conditions which are displayed and printed with the time and date. 2-5.4.3 SET MENU FUNCTION
The system enters an alarm mode if a device (or devices) has detected an alarm condition, such as smoke/heat above the alarm threshold level. There are two types of alarms which can occur: 1. Device AlarmAn alarm in which a device has communicated the alarm status properly to the Central Control Panel, by providing the alarmed device address for indication to the operator. 2. Zone AlarmAn alarm condition detected by one or several devices, but which cannot be reported by a specific device due to a malfunction in communications between the system and the alarmed device(s). This is a redundant feature to increase system reliability and is called FailSoft Mode. Note: 2-6.2.1 A device can signal a zone alarm to the system during some communication failures. ALARM MODE INDICATIONS
The set menu function permits the operator to program various system parameters within the system. A few examples are shown in Table 2-4. 2-5.4.4 TEST MENU FUNCTION
The test menu function, shown in Table 2-5, allows the operator to test an individual or a group of field devices. On command, a detector or contact input device can be tested, and results will be printed and displayed at the Central Control Panel. The test procedure in the device is activated by imposing a signal within the device that will cause an alarm output. The Control Panel verifies that an alarm output is generated, and reports Test Result OK for each device. 2-6 MODES OF OPERATION
The following indicates the system is in its alarm mode of operation: The red ALARM LED will be illuminated and there will be a continuous audible signal by the system buzzer at the panel, and The 80-character display will cycle between all currently active alarms. See Figure 2-3 for example.
The PEGAsys system has four modes of operation. Each mode has different indications and actions required. The following paragraphs describe each mode, indications and actions to be taken, if required. 2-6.1 Normal Standby Mode
This is the typical mode of the system. In this mode, no alarm, trouble or supervisory conditions exist in the system. The system display will show the time and date. In this mode, the LCD could read: SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL 11:06 AM_05-04-90 40_CHARACTER_CUSTOM_MESSAGE The system provides an option which allows the System Status Normal message to be replaced with a display of battery charging voltage and current for the system standby batteries. For example: PS01_26.0 V_0.10_A_ _ _ _ _11:06 AM_05-04-90 40_CHARACTER_CUSTOM_MESSAGE The green AC POWER LED will be illuminated to indicate that the systems main power source is normal. Note: In the Normal Standby Operation state, it is possible for the 80-character display to show data other than the time and date. This occurs when the system menus are being accessed either locally or remotely through one of its serial ports. This condition will be indicated by the menu selections being displayed on the display panel.
Figure 2-3. Active Alarms Example Note: If the alarm is a zone alarm, the Device Address 1000-8000 will be displayed depending on which RX/TX module detects the zone alarm.
The outputs which have been previously programmed for activation upon alarm by the specific devices will be turned on (e.g., signal audible signaling devices, control relays for HVAC shutdown or elevator recall). 2-6.2.2 ALARM MODE USER ACTION
The following steps should be performed when the system is set into alarm: 1. Press the display panels <ACKLDGE> button to acknowledge the displayed alarm condition. The 80-character display will continue to cycle between any remaining alarms which have not been acknowledged.
In the Normal Standby Mode, no indicating LEDs will be illuminated other than the AC POWER.
76-100016-001
2-7
July 2003
PEGAsys
Table 2-2. Isolate Menu Function
Function Isolate Loop Device Isolate Module Signal Output Isolate Module Release Signal Output Isolate CCM Signal Output Isolate Module Relay Output Isolate CCM Relay Output Isolate Module Release Output Isolate CCM Agent Release Output Isolate City Tie Output Isolate Digital Input/Output Global Isolate Inputs Global Isolate Outputs Description Isolate/De-isolate an RCU by address Isolate/De-isolate a signal module output circuit by address Isolate/De-isolate a release module signal output by address. Isolate/De-isolate A CCM signal output Isolate/De-isolate a I/O module relay output by address Isolate/De-isolate CCM relay output Isolate/De-isolate an agent release output by output address Isolate/De-isolate an agent release output by CCM output address Isolate/De-isolate city tie module by output address Isolate/De-isolate digital input/output by address Isolate/De-isolate all system input loop devices; modules Isolate/De-isolate all system output modules Formula 1-1 1-2-1 1-2-2 1-2-3 1-3-1 1-3-2 1-4-1 1-4-2 1-5 1-6 1-7-1 1-7-2 Access Level 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 2/M 2/M
Note:
1 = Level One, 2 = Level Two, M = Manufacturer Level Table 2-3. List Menu Function
Function Description List all Loop Devices which are isolated List all modules which are isolated List all CCM outputs which are isolated Lists all recorded event history entries from buffer Lists a user selectable range of event history entries by date Displays a selected detectors real time smoke/heat level Lists all system detectors pre-alarm and alarm setpoints and present level. List all active system alarm(s). List all active system supervisory conditions. List all active system trouble conditions List EOC program lines List RTC program lines List all loop devices registered into the system List all modules registered into the system Lists PC line voltage levels at each specified loop device Lists specified loop device 9 volt power supply level Formula 2-1-1-1 2-1-2-1 2-1-2-2 2-2-1 2-2-2 2-3-1 2-3-2 2-4-1 2-4-2 2-4-3 2-5-1 2-5-2 2-6-1 2-6-2 2-7-1 2-7-2 Access Level 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M
List Isolated Loop Devices List Isolated Modules List Isolated CCM outputs List Event History Buffer (All Events) List Event History Buffer (Range of Events) List a Single Detector List Detector Level List Active Alarm(s) List Active Supervisory Conditions List Active Trouble Condition List EOC Program List RTC Program List Loop Device Addresses List Module Addresses List PC Line Voltage Levels List Loop Device 9 Vdc power supply level
Note:
1 = Level One, 2 = Level Two, M = Manufacturer Level
July 2003
2-8
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Table 2-4. Set Menu Function
F u n ctio n Set System Time Set System Date Set Display of Battery (V+I) Set Internal Printer Disable Internal Printer Set External Printer Disable External Printer Set Device Address Set Ionization Detector Sensitivity Set Photoelectric Detector Sensitivity Set Thermal Detector Sensitivity Register Devices De-Register Devices Blink Control Set Day/Night Mode Set Day / Night Periods Activate Day Mode Set 1st level Password Set 2nd level Password Enable RTC Program Disable RTC Program Set AutoLearn Mode Set Alarm Verification Set PAS Function Clear Event Log Global Acknowledge Enable Global Acknowledge Disable Allows user to set system time Allows user to set system date Allow user to set display of battery charging voltage and current. Enable port for internal printer connection Disable port for internal printer connection Enable port for external printer connection Disable port for external printer connection Allows user to change device address. Allows user to adjust Ionization detector pre-alarm and alarm settings Allows user to adjust Photoelectric detector pre-alarm and alarm settings Allows user to adjust Thermal detector pre-alarm and alarm settings Allows user to register loop devices into system configuration Allows user to de-register loop devices from system configuration Allows user to disable detector LED blinking Allows user to enable detector for day function. Allows user to set Day/Night periods Allows user to activate Day mode Allows user to set 1st level password Allows user to set 2nd level password. Allows user to enable RTC program line to function Allows user to disable RTC program line from functioning. Allows user to activate the AutoLearn Function Allows user to set the alarm verification function and time period for an individual detector or range of detectors. Allows user to set the positive alarm sequence for devices Allows user to clear event history buffer entries Enables the Global Acknowledge Feature Disables the Global Acknowledge Feature D escrip tio n F o rmu la 3-1-1 3-1-2 3-1-3 3-2-1-1 3-2-1-2 3-2-2-1 3-2-2-2 3-3-1 3-3-2-1 3-3-2-2 3-3-2-3 3-3-3 3-3-4 3-3-5 3-4-1-1 3-4-1-2 3-4-1-3 3-4-2-1 3-4-2-2 3-4-3-1 3-4-3-2 3-4-4 3-4-5 3-4-6 3-4-7 3-8-1 3-8-2 Ac c e s s L e v e l 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M
Note:
1. For installation in the state of California, Alarm Verification Time must not exceed 30 seconds. 2. 1 = Level One, 2 = Level Two, M = Manufacturer Level
76-100016-001
2-9
July 2003
PEGAsys
Table 2-5. Test Menu Functions
F u n ctio n Lamp Test Loop Devi ce Test Battery Test Enable Walk Test Di sable Walk Test Alarm Si mulati on Test D escrip tio n Enable user to test system LEDs functi onali ty Allows user to acti vate an electroni c test of a detector or group of detectors Allows user to acti vate a battery test to veri fy battery capaci ty Allows user to speci fy a range of devi ces to walk test Allows user to di sable walk test mode Allows i nstaller to veri fy programmed relati onshi p of i nputs to outputs by acti vati ng i nputs and veri fyi ng outputs are acti ve F o rmu la 4-1 4-2-1 4-3 4-4-1 4-4-2 4-5 Ac c e s s L e v e l 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M
Note:
WARNING: The Alarm Simulation Test must be used with care. When activated, the Alarm Simulation Test (AST) processes pre-programmed outputs which are related to the activated (simulated) input device. Before using the AST, ensure that any associated outputs are disconnected or isolated to prevent unexpected outputs (releases, signals or shutdowns). 1 = Level One, 2 = Level Two, M = Manufacturer Level
The <ACKLDGE> button must be pressed once for each alarm received at the panel. 2. Once all current alarms have been acknowledged, the alarm indicating circuits (audible devices) can be silenced by operating the SILENCE switch. 3. After all of the current alarms have been acknowledged, verify that the display reads: XXX ALARMS REMAIN. The XXX represents the total of all active alarms. All active alarms can be viewed on the display by pressing the <SCROLL> button. Note: Only the first 64 alarms will be displayed. Subsequent alarms over the initial 64 will not be displayed, even when any or all of the first 64 alarms clear. However, all alarmsregardless of the totalwill be processed in the EOC. For a complete list of active alarms, access the event buffer menu using the CCM keypad.
For latching mode: To return the system to normal, press the <RESET> button once. If powering a 4-wire detector from the PEGAsys, the <RESET> button will need to be pushed once to reset the detector and once to reset the panel to a normal condition. 7. Once all alarms have been cleared in non-latching operation, the display will read: NO ACTIVE ALARM REMAINS. At this time, the system may be reset by operating the <RESET> button. 8. When the system is properly reset, the display will show the System Status Normal message, time and date. The preceding will happen if no active troubles or supervisories are present, in which case the Active Troubles or Active Supervisories message will be displayed. 2-6.3 Active Supervisory Mode The system enters supervisory mode when it detects an abnormal condition in the system that has been defined to be a higher priority than a common trouble. This type of trouble is usually assigned by the installer/designer to monitor critical parts of the system. 2-6.3.1 SUPERVISORY MODE INDICATION
4. Any subsequent alarms will cause any silenced alarm circuits to reactivate. Each additional alarm must be acknowledged before the alarm indicating circuits can be silenced. 5. When a non-latching device goes out of alarm, the display will indicate the device address and produce an alarm off (AOF) message. For example: 1080 AOF_ _ _ _PHOTOELECTRIC DETECTOR 40_CHARACTER_LOCATION_MESSAGE Note: If the alarm is a zone alarm, the address 10008000 will be displayed, indicating that active device(s) in Failsoft mode on the indicated SLC have gone out of alarm.
The following indicates the system is in the supervisory mode of operation. The yellow SUPERVISORY LED will be flashing at a one (1) second rate, and there will be a pulsing buzzer at the CCM. This audible is distinctively different from the alarm signal pattern at the CCM. The 80-character display will cycle between all currently active supervisory events. See Figure 2-4 for an example.
6. Each device which goes out of alarm must be acknowledged with the <ACKLDGE> button (non-latching).
July 2003 2-10
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
The yellow TROUBLE LED will be flashing at a one (1) second rate, and there will be a pulsing panel buzzer at the CCP. This audible signal is distinctively different from the alarm audible signal. The 80-character display will cycle between all currently active troubles and pre-alarms. For example:
Figure 2-4. Supervisory Example for Supervisory Mode Indication 2-6.3.2 SUPERVISORY MODE USER ACTION
The following steps should be performed when the system enters the supervisory mode of operation: 1. To silence the supervisory audible signal, all current supervisories must be acknowledged by pressing the <ACKLDGE> button. This will silence the system buzzer. 2. When all supervisory conditions have been acknowledged, the 80-character display will read: XXX ACTIVE SUPERVISORIES REMAIN, with XXX representing the total number of active supervisory events. All current supervisory conditions can be viewed on the display by pressing the <SCROLL> button. 3. As each supervisory condition is cleared, the display will read one (1) less active supervisory event until all supervisories are clear. When all active supervisory events have been cleared, the SUPERVISORY LED will be extinguished, and the 80-character display will show the Standby Message (e.g., "System Status Normal"). Note: The system has the option to acknowledge both supervisory and common troubles on a global basis. The panel, by default, will require that each trouble and supervisory event be acknowledged individually. However, if the installer wishes to enable this function, it can be done by accessing the "set" menu option using the CCM keypad. Refer to Table 2-4 for more information on stepping through the menus to enable and disable the Global Acknowledge function. With global acknowledge, a total of thirty (30) troubles and supervisory events can be acknowledged at one time. Active Trouble Mode Figure 2-5. Active Troubles and Pre-Alarms Example 2-6.4.2 TROUBLE MODE USER ACTION
The following steps should be performed when the system is in the trouble mode of operation: 1. To silence the trouble audible signal, all current trouble conditions must be acknowledged by pressing the <ACKLDGE> button. This will silence the system buzzer. 2. When all trouble conditions have been acknowledged, the 80-character display will read: XXX ACTIVE TROUBLES REMAIN, with XXX representing the total number of active troubles. All current trouble conditions can be viewed on the display by pressing the <SCROLL> button. Note: Only the first 300 troubles (supervisory or common) on a Single-Loop will be displayed. Subsequent troubles or supervisories will not be displayed, even if any, or all 300 troubles clear. However, all of the active troubles or supervisories will be processed and entered into the event buffer. For a complete listing of all troubles and supervisories over the initial 300, access the event buffer by using the CCM keypad. For the multi-loop system, only the first 2100 troubles or supervisories will be displayed. Subsequent troubles or supervisories over the first 2100 will not be displayed, even if any, or all 2100 troubles or supervisories clear. However, all troubles or supervisoriesregardless of the total will be processed and entered into the event buffer. For a complete listing of all active troubles and supervisories, access the event buffer by using the CCM keypad. 3. As each trouble condition is cleared, the display will read one (1) less active trouble until all troubles are cleared. When all active troubles have been cleared, the TROUBLE LED will be extinguished, and the 80character display will show the standby message (e.g., "System Status Normal").
2-11 July 2003
2-6.4
The system enters trouble mode when it detects an abnormal condition that may prevent proper operation (e.g., loss of communications with a smoke detector) or when a pre-alarm condition occurs. Refer to Appendix G for a complete list of trouble conditions. 2-6.4.1 TROUBLE MODE INDICATIONS
The following indicates that the system is in its trouble mode of operation.
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Note: The system has the option to acknowledge both supervisory and common troubles on a global basis. The panel, by default, will require that each trouble be acknowledged individually. However, if the installer wishes to enable this function, it can be done by accessing the "set" menu option using the CCM keypad. Refer to Table 2-4 for more information on stepping through the menus to enable and disable the Global Acknowledge function. With global acknowledge, a total of thirty (30) troubles can be acknowledged at one time. PRINTING OPERATION c. The system normally processes the EOC from left to right. However, in equations with parentheses, the contents of the parentheses are executed first. Refer to the PCS manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015) for further details. 2-8.1.1 LISTING EOC PROGRAMMING
The system's Event Output Control (EOC) program can be listed using either the owner's or installer's menu functions. To list the system's EOC programming: 1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows: a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD b. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password. Press the return () key. Verify that the display reads: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST
2-7
In addition to the LCD display, the PEGAsys system information can be viewed using the printer port of the CCM. For detailed information pertaining to connecting an RS232 peripheral device, see Paragraph 7-18. When the printer port is enabled and a serial printer is attached, the system will print out all status change information and any system information lists that the user would request from the system using the integral keypad. 2-8 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING
2. Select the EOC program list by typing the formula 2-5-1. The system will then list all lines of the Event Output Control program on the LCD and send a printout to any attached printer. 2-8.2 RTC Programming The RTC program permits outputs to be controlled by the systems real-time clock. Outputs may be programmed to occur on an hour, day, week and month time control basis. Alarm and pre-alarm threshold levels of all or individual detectors can be increased or decreased in sensitivity (within UL limits) under RTC control. The RTC programming also provides the ability to control RCU relays, output module relays and smoke detector pre-alarm and alarm set points. The program consists of sequentially numbered lines, each containing control object, control content, time, date and day of week. For further details, refer to the PCS manual. 2-8.2.1 LISTING RTC PROGRAMMING
The PEGAsys fire alarm system incorporates two unique programming languages that are easy to understand and use. These two versatile programming languages, Event Output Control (EOC) and Real-Time Control (RTC), can accommodate most any fire alarm control logic applications. The system is programmed using a personal computer connected to the system via an interface cable. The two programs are constructed by the system engineer/installer using the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) program which is Windows based. The PCS program allows the user to configure, verify, upload, download, edit, retrieve, store and print the entire system configuration program. Refer to the PCS manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015) for further details. 2-8.1 EOC Programming
The RTC program can be listed using either the owner's or installer's menu functions. To list the RTC programming: 1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows: a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD b. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password. c. Press the return () key. Verify that the display reads: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST
The Event Output Control (EOC) program logically combines the systems input devices with the system's output devices. The program consists of sequentially numbered lines of equations containing input addresses, output addresses and logic operators. When an input becomes true (active), the system processes the EOC program and activates any associated outputs as programmed. Example: The simplest event output control (EOC) equation would be: Input = Output A basic equation with one or more inputs would be: Input Operator Input = Output
2. Select the RTC program by typing the formula 2-5-2. The system will then list all lines of the RealTime Control program on the LCD and send a printout to any attached printer.
July 2003
2-12
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
2-8.2.2 ENABLE/DISABLE RTC PROGRAM LINE NUMBERS Failed communications between the CCM and RX/TX module (Trouble Condition), Failed RX/TX or CCM processor. (Trouble Condition), or Failed input circuit of RCU device.
Each line number of the RTC Program is automatically enabled when entered into the system. Once a line number in the RTC Program has been disabled using the procedure below, the line will be ignored by the RTC Program until enabled. To enable a line number which has been previously disabled, follow the procedure below; select "ENABLE" in step 2. 1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows: a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD b. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password. 2. Select the set RTC program by typing the formula 3-4-3. Verify the display reads: 1:ENABLE 2:DISABLE 3. Select the desired choice and press return. Verify the display reads: RTC LINE NUMBER _ _ _ 4. Type the three digit line number and press the return key. 5. Continue with another RTC line or press backspace key to cancel this function. 2-8.3 Types of Inputs and Outputs The PEGAsys has various input and output devices/modules, which are discussed in the following paragraphs: 2-8.3.1 SYSTEM INPUTS
An alarmed input device on the RX/TX (in FailSoft mode) can only activate EOC programming if the RX/TX zone is used as a programmed input (ZA1=1000, ZA2=2000, ZA8 = 8000, etc.). 2-8.3.4 SYSTEM OUTPUTS
Devices which are classified as system outputs are CCM signals and relays (programmable/non programmable); output modules (signal outputs, relay outputs, agent release outputs, release signal outputs, city tie outputs) and loop devices (addressable relay output module or signal/ sounder module). 2-8.3.5 SYSTEM OUTPUT MODULES
The output modules which the system supports are Signal Outputs, Relay Outputs, Agent Release (agent and signal) outputs and the City Tie output. 2-8.4 Addressing Output Modules
The output modules include: Signal Audible, Relay Output, Agent Release Output, City Tie output and the power supply module. Output modules refer to any module which installs into the optional output motherboard or multi-loop motherboard with the exception of the power supply module(s). The output modules communicate with the CCM over the RS-485 communications bus. Each module has outputs which can be individually addressed. The address consists of two (2) alphabetic and two (2) numeric characters which define the module type, address and output circuit number. The output module address scheme is shown below.
SG 1 : 3
I/O Circuit Number (1-4), See note 1. Module Address (1-8), See note 2. Module Type, See note 3. SG Signal/Audible Output RY Relay Output CT City Tie Output AR Agent Release Output RS Release Signal Output PS Power Supply Monitor Module
Devices which are classified as system inputs are smoke detectors, heat detectors, addressable contact monitors (alarm, trouble, abort, waterflow, manual alarm, manual release, supervisory and normal) and HSSD detectors reporting via PALM modules. Refer to the PCS manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015) for further details. 2-8.3.2 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT (RCU)
The RCU input and output devices, which are connected to the RX/TX loop(s), are specified in the EOC program by their four-digit addresses. 2-8.3.3 RX/TX LOOPS
The system specifies the RX/TX loop controller using its loop number followed by three zeros (1000 for RX/TX 1) in single loop systems and (1000-8000) in multi-loop systems. The specifier (1000-8000) will appear in cases when trouble conditions are present on a particular RX/TX loop controller (i.e., a PC Line Short on RX/TX 1 would be displayed as "RX/TX PC Line Short Loop 1"). RX/TX loop (zone) alarms occur if a loop device alarm initiates under one of the following conditions:
Figure 2-6. Output Module Address Scheme
76-100016-001
2-13
July 2003
PEGAsys
Note: 1. The output modules vary in number of outputs. Refer to section one component description for thorough descriptions of options. 2. The PEGAsys system can support a total of sixteen (16) output modules for single-loop and twenty-three (23) output modules for multi-loop, eight (8) maximum of any one output module type. 3. Power supply monitors only need an address; they have no need for an output number. The output module address is set using the three (3) dip switches contained on each PCB assembly. Each module uses different numbered switches for module address assignment. The address is set during the installation procedure by placing the switches into the correct position. Refer to the appropriate figure in Appendix I for the correct module and the addressing matrix. For a functional description of each module, refer to Chapter 3. The switches would be set for each type of module in order. For example, signal modules would be addressed 1-8 if there were eight (8) in the system; relay modules would be addressed 1-8 if there were eight (8) in the system and the same holds true for the remaining modules. The only exception being the City Tie modulethere can only be one City Tie module in a system at any time. 2-8.5 Registering Output Module Assignments 2-8.6 Addressing RCUs
RCUs refer to all devices which connect and operate from the RX/TX PC (Power/Communications) Line. These devices include SmartOne smoke detectors, SmartOne heat detectors, addressable contact input monitors, addressable output modules (AOs or ASMs) and PALM Orion XT monitor modules. Each device has a three-digit numeric address. This address is stored in the nonvolatile EEPROM memory of the device. The device is identified by the CCM by these three digits, and by a fourth digit which represents the RX/TX number. There are two ways to address the RCU (Loop) devices. 1. The RCUs (except PALMs) can be addressed using the Hand Held Programmer (P/N 74-200013-001). This optional unit provides a convenient means of addressing RCUs without using the CCM. (See Paragraph 3-3.2.1 for instructions on addressing PALMs.) 2. The user may address the devices individually on the system by performing the procedure listed below. To address RCUs using the SET RCU Address menu function, each unaddressed RCU must be connected to the RX/TX PC line one at a time. Perform the following steps for each RCU: 1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows: a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD b. Type in the Level 2 password. c. Press the return () key. Verify that the display reads: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST
Output modules are registered into the system configuration through the use of the PCS program. The installer would configure all modules in the PCS program file and then upload this file to the system which would then internally verify the existence of the specified modules. For further details on output module registration, refer to the PCS manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015). Added RX/TX Modules in the multi-loop systems are automatically registered by the CCM upon system power-up. 2-8.5.1 LISTING OUTPUT MODULE ASSIGNMENT
2. Select the set RCU address function by typing the formula 3-3-1. Verify that the display reads: PRESENT LOOP DEVICE ADDRESS _ _ _ _ Note: All new addressable devices have an address of zero (000).
All output modules which are programmed into the system may be listed with the use of either the owner's or installer's menu functions. 1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows: a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD b. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password. c. Press the return () key. Verify that the display reads: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST
3. Enter the present RCU address and press the <RETURN> button. The system will display the following: TARGET LOOP DEVICE ADDRESS _ _ _ _ 4. Enter the desired address for the RCU and press <RETURN>. The system will now change the RCU address if it is different from the previous address. The 40-character owner location message cannot be entered using the system keypad. The owner's location message can only be entered and uploaded into the system by use of the PCS program .
2. Select the list of module address assignments by typing the formula 2-6-2. The system will then list all of the registered output module addresses on the LCD and send a printout to any attached printer.
July 2003 2-14
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
2-8.7 Registering RCUs The AutoLearn function works much the same as the registration function, as it automatically enters the devices which it can identify into the system's configuration memory. During both the AutoLearn and RCU Registration procedures, the CCM will automatically register the loop devices into memory and also set each device to default settings (e.g., sensitivity levels and input reporting) for the particular device. The CCM will also set the default operation of the CCM outputs (MP01, MP02, MP03 and MP04). Any system alarm received after this time will cause all the CCM outputs (MP01-MP04) to activate. Optionally, if the output motherboard and output modules have been installed, the PCS program will need to be used to configure the system for use with the output modules. Procedures for registering output modules are provided in the PCS manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015, see Paragraph 2-8.4 Addressing Output Modules). 2-8.7.1 DETECTOR REGISTRATION
Registration is where the device address is joined with the device information in the system's memory. Device information is comprised of: device type, device messages and device settings. There are four ways to register the RCU (loop) devices into the system: 1. The user may register the devices individually in the system. 2. The user may register all pre-addressed RCUs at once using the RCU (loop devices) registration function. 3. The user may register all pre-addressed RCUs using the AutoLearn function, which sets all devices at default values, and, in turn, any system alarm input activates all system outputs. If pre-addressed devices are used, multiple devices can be attached and registered into the system at one time using either the AutoLearn or RCU Registration function. 4. The RCUs can also be registered into the system by using the PCS program. The installer would specify each RCU to be connected to the system, and then upload the system configuration file to the system. The system would then supervise each device specified. Refer to the PCS manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015) for further details on RCU registration.
1032
001-255 = Device Address (registered) 000 = Device Address (unaddressed/ unregistered) RXTX loop number 1 for single-loop systems, 1-8 for multi-loop systems
SmartOne smoke and heat detectors would be registered in the system in the same fashion as the RCUs explained in the previous section. However, detection device application, the alarm and pre-alarm levels, and latching or non-latching options will have to be selected. There are three specific applications for smoke detector use: Open Area, Open Area (High Air Flow) and Duct. The smoke and heat detector's pre-alarm and alarm set points are adjusted only when necessary if the user desires the set points to be different from the default values for each detector type. The detectors will use the default values, unless otherwise programmed. To adjust the set points for the detectors, refer to Chapter 5, Setting and Adjusting Smoke and Heat Detector Sensitivities. The 40-character owner location message cannot be entered using the system keypad. The owner's location message can only be entered through the PCS program, and then uploaded into system memory. 2-8.7.2 ADDRESSABLE MONITOR MODULE REGISTRATION
Figure 2-7. RCU Registration Screen Example: RCU 1032 represents device 32 on RX/TX loop 1. Connecting an unregistered RCU address to the RX/TX will result in a "not registered" trouble (TBL NR), indicating that the control panel has communicated with the device and identified the device as being unregistered. To register RCU devices using the register RCU function, attach all pre-addressed loop devices to the PC line of the RX/TX module. Power-up the system (if it is not already running). As the loop devices power up, they will begin to communicate with the RX/TX module. The CCM will recognize the loop devices as not registered, and will issue a trouble message for each non-registered (TBL NR) device attached. When the register RCU function is enabled, the CCM will prompt the user to enter a range of loop device addresses to register as valid system devices. At the conclusion of the register function, the CCM will display the total amount of devices registered.
The addressable contact monitors are registered in the system in the same fashion as the RCUs explained in the previous section. The system will, by default, set the response of the device activation to alarm. During system configuration (using the PCS program), the following choices are allowed: Alarm, Trouble, Abort, Supervisory, Manual Alarm, Manual Release, WaterFlow or Normal. See below for the specific contact monitor selections. Contact monitor RCUs are also registered into the system through the PCS program. The installer would specify each contact monitor RCU to be connected to the system and then upload the system configuration file to the system. The system would then supervise each device specified. Refer to the PCS manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015) for further details on RCU registration.
2-15 July 2003
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
1: AlarmActive input initiates an alarm at the central control panel and is latched in the EOC until the system is reset after alarm has cleared. 2: TroubleActive input initiates a trouble at the central control panel, but does not latch EOC programming and will self restore upon deactivation. 3: AbortActive input initiates an abort condition at the central control panel. This will delay agent release if countdown has begun. It does not latch EOC program and will self-restore upon deactivation. There are four (4) styles of abort available for the device. 4: WaterflowActive input initiates a waterflow alarm condition at the central control panel and is latched in EOC program until reset. Signal outputs will be inhibited from being silenced. 5: Manual AlarmActive input initiates a manual alarm condition at the central control panel, latches in EOC program until reset. 6: Manual ReleaseActive input initiates a manual release condition at the central control panel, causes instant release of programmed output, latches in EOC program until reset 7: NormalActive input initiates a momentary display but does not latch in EOC program, self-restores. 8: SupervisoryActive input initiates a supervisory event at the central control panel, but does not latch the EOC, and will self-restore upon deactivation. The 40-character owner location message cannot be entered using the system keypad. The owner's location message can only be entered by use of the PCS program and uploaded into system memory. 2-8.7.3 REMOTE CONTROL MODULE REGISTRATION PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD b. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password. c. Press the return () key. Verify that the display reads: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST
2. Select the List RCU address function by typing the formula 2-6-1. Verify that the display and any attached printers list all registered RCU addresses. 2-8.7.5 DE-REGISTERING RCUs The system provides the capability to remove a single device or group of devices from the system configuration. This function removes the device address from the system memory but leaves the address in the device intact. Performing this operation will cause the system to generate a trouble NR (Not Registered) for any devices which remain connected to the RX/TX PC line. Removal or disconnection of the device(s) from the PC line will clear the trouble condition(s) in the system. This function would be used during a system retrofit where some devices are to be removed from the system temporarily during a building renovation and then reattached after renovations are complete. This feature is very efficient because the device maintains its address information which speeds device reregistering after the renovations. To perform the device de-registering operation: 1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows: a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD b. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password. c. Press the return () key. Verify that the display reads: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST
The addressable output device (AO or ASM) is registered in the same fashion as the previous RCUs. Control modules can also be registered into the system by using the PCS program. The installer would specify each output RCU to be connected to the system, upload the system configuration file to the system and then the system would supervise each device specified. Refer to the PCS manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015) for further details on RCU registration. The 40-character owner location message cannot be entered using the system keypad. The owner's location message can only be entered by use of the PCS program and uploaded into system memory. 2-8.7.4 LISTING ALL REGISTERED RCUs
2. Select the set RCU De-Registration function by typing the formula 3-3-4. Verify that the display reads: DEVICE DE-REGISTRATION DEVICE FROM_ _ _ _TO_ _ _ _ 3. Enter the desired RCU address(es) and press return. The display will show the following to verify the device de-registration: DEVICE DE-REGISTRATION XX DEVICES DE-REGISTERED 4. Verify that the display changes to the device menu after five seconds. The backspace key can be pressed to return to the main menu. 5. To reregister RCU devices, perform the procedure which is outlined Paragraph 2-8.7, Registering RCUs.
All RCUs registered in the system can be listed using either the owner's or installer's menu function. To list all registered RCUs: 1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows: a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads:
July 2003 2-16
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

3-1 INTRODUCTION 3-2 BLOCK DIAGRAM
This chapter provides a functional description of the devices/modules used in the PEGAsys system configuration. Each functional description covers one of the blocks shown in Figures 3-1 and 3-2.
The PEGAsys system is divided into ten functional blocks as follows: Central Control Module Display Module
24 Vdc
ATM Driver Module(s) 5 Vdc RS 485 RS 485 Display Module 24 Vdc 24 Vdc AC Input Battery Backup Central Control Module
Channel 1 Network Interface Card RS 485 RS 485 Channel 2 RS 485 To Networked Control Unit(s)
RS 485 Remote Display Module(s)
24 Vdc
Power Supply No. 1 RS 485
RX/TX - CCM Communications
Receiver/ Transmitter Module (RX/TX)
SLC to RCUs (Field Devices)
24 Vdc 24 Vdc RS 485 Output Motherboard 1 RS 485 Output Motherboard 2 24 Vdc RS 485 Power Supply No. 2 AC Input Battery Backup
RS 485 24 Vdc Output Module(s)
RS 485 24 Vdc Output Module(s)
Figure 3-1. Overall Block Diagram, Single-Loop System

Channel 1
24 Vdc ATM Driver Module(s)
Network Interface Card 5 Vdc RS 485

RS 485
RS 485 Channel 2 RS 485
To Networked Control Unit(s)
RS 485 Remote Display Module(s)
RS 485
24 Vdc
Display Module
24 Vdc 24 Vdc Central Control Module

RX/TX 1 - CCM Communications 24 Vdc
SLC 1 to RCUs RX/TX Module 1 SLC N to RCUs RX/TX Module N Output Module(s)
AC Input Battery Backup
Power Supply No. 1 RS 485
RX/TX - CCM Communications
Multi-Loop Motherboard
RX/TX N - CCM Communications 24 Vdc RS-485 24 Vdc
24 Vdc RS 485 RS 485 Output Motherboard 24 Vdc RS 485 RS 485 24 Vdc Output Module(s) Power Supply No. 2 AC Input Battery Backup
Figure 3-2. Overall Block Diagram, Multi-Loop System

76-100016-001 3-1 July 2003
PEGAsys
RX/TX Module Output Modules RCUs (Field Devices) Power Supply Module Motherboard Remote Display/Control Modules (Optional) ATM Driver Modules (Optional) Network Interface Card (Optional) sion 7X.X firmware and P/N 76-100008-701, networkable, ORION XT compatible, Version 8X.X firmware) and multiloop (P/N 76-100008-600, networkable, Version 7X.X firmware and P/N 76-100008-800, networkable, ORION XT compatible, Version 8X.X firmware). Figure 3-3 contains the main central processing unit, real-time clock, watch dog timer and RS-232 serial communication input/output ports. The CCM controls the operation and supervision of all the system modules and software within the PEGAsys system. It receives loop device data from the RX/TX modules, processes the data based on pre-programmed instructions and transmits output commands to the output modules, field devices and display module(s). The CCM provides two RS-232C serial ports for programming and monitoring of the PEGAsys system. These ports accept six-wire RJ-12 modular connectors. The PCS program is used to interface to the system for programming purposes. A multi-level password scheme protects the system from unauthorized access. The real-time clock provides the CCM with the ability to display the current time and date on the system LCD and control the system with time-based programming. Internal diagnostics enhance the troubleshooting ability of the system. For example, microprocessor failure, memory failure, RS-232 port troubles, etcetera.
See Note 1
SOUNDER 1 A B + + SOUNDER 2 B A + + VOLT FREE RELAYS 1 2 NO NC C NO NC C V/F RELAY FAULT NO NC C
REP 1 REP 2
As described in Paragraph 1-1.2, the system is available in two configurations: single-loop and multi-loop. The above devices/modules for both configurations are shown in the Overall Functional Block Diagrams, Figures 3-1 and 3-2. Each device/module is described in detail in Paragraph 3-3. 3-3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
The functional descriptions will describe each device or module depicted in Figures 3-1 and 3-2. 3-3.1 Central Control Module
The Central Control Module (CCM) is available in two versions: single-loop (P/N 76-100008-501, networkable, Ver-
TB4
TB5
TB1
TB2
TB3
SKT1
Note 1: The trouble relay contacts are shown in the unpowered state. Note 2: Jumpers JP1-JP4 are used to configure MP01 to be signaling (default) or releasing outputs. See Appendix I for further details.
See Note 2
CCM Reset Button
JP4
JP3
JP1 SW1
JP2 JK5
I/O PORT
BT1
RX/TX PORT
To Output Modules and Power Supplies To RX/TX Loop Controller
JK1
JK2
JK3
1
PLG2 TB6
24V 5V 0V
EARTH FLT SUPPLY FLT
JK4
DISP PORT
PRINT PORT
P.C. PORT
PLG1
DISPLAY
To External Printer
To Remote P.C. For Programing 24 Vdc From Power Supply

Processor Port Display Reset Switch Display Trouble LED
BUZZER
PLG3 SW1
PLG2
SUPPLY FAULT
EARTH FAULT
PRINT PORT
DS1
PLG1
PLG2
JK2
JK3
24 VDC TB6
JK1
Display Port
0V
24V
0V
5V 0V
PC Port
Figure 3-3. Central Control Module, Details

July 2003 3-2 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Two individually programmable signal output circuits (MP1 and MP2) can be used for signaling devices (horns, strobes, bells) and allow up to 2.0 Amps of 24 Vdc power. One of the two outputs is programmed for releasing solenoid type suppression equipment (Agent and Sprinkler type systems). Two individually programmable relay outputs (MP3 and MP4) are on the CCM for controlling building functions during alarm occurrences. These relay outputs are activated through the EOC programming which allows system inputs to be related to system outputs. Each of these relays have Form C contacts, rated at 1 A, 30 Vdc. One non-programmable trouble relay is supplied, which is normally powered and will transfer on any system trouble, pre-alarm or complete power-off condition. Form C contact rating is 1 A @ 30 Vdc. See Appendix I for further installation details. An event history buffer is provided in the CCM which will store 1024 entries for single-loop and 6100 entries for multiloop of system event information and allow the operator to retrieve this information for review of system operation. The PCS program provides the ability to download, store and print all or a portion of the Event History Buffer. 3-3.2 Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX)
The RX/TX functions as the hardware and software interface between the loop devices and the CCM. Each installed RX/TX module continually monitors all addressable devices for alarm and trouble conditions. Each device is capable of initiating and sending alarm and trouble messages to the RX/TX module to which it is connected. The RX/TX receives control requests from the CCM and establishes communications with the loop devices. The RX/TX receives status changes from the loop devices and
STYLE 6 Signal Line Circuit, with Loop Isolator
24 Vdc (Red)
Loop Isolator
RS-232 Port for Communication with CCM
Zone 1
Zone 2
Loop Isolator
Zone 3
See Note
Loop Isolator
Loop Isolator
CPU Reset
PC Line Normal
LOOP ISOLATOR Mounted to RX/TX 74-200012-001
CPU Reset
PC Line Reset
Loop Isolator for Style 7 (74-200012-001)
RX/TX
Note: Each zone can consist of 30 loop devices between loop isolators
STYLE 7 Signal Line Circuit
See Note
Loop Isolator Loop Isolator

Zone 2
Note: Refer to jumper table in Appendix I

1 2 3 4
Zone 1
See Note
Loop Isolator
RX/TX
Note: Adjacent loop isolators must be within 20 ft. of a device with wiring in conduit to be in accordance with NFPA Style 7 requirements.
Figure 3-4. Receiver/Transmitter Module, Details

76-100016-001 3-3 July 2003
1 2 3 4
1 2 3
1 2 3 4
24V RET 24V RET
RX/TX 76-100005-001
Loop Isolator Loop Isolator
Zone 3
Loop Isolator
24V RET 24V RET
PEGAsys
reports these changes to the CCM. The RX/TX (see Figure 3-4) is capable of communicating with up to 255 intelligent devices and complies with the Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) requirements of NFPA-72 Style 4, 6 and 7. Style 4 initiation circuit wiring will permit T tapping or branch circuitry. Style 7 requires the use of isolator devices. 3-3.3 Power Supply/Charger Assembly Trouble relay that transfers upon any power supply trouble or power off condition (relay shown in the non-powered state) Two auxiliary 24 Vdc outputs (programmable for switched or non-switched configurations)
The power supply/charger assembly (see Figure 3-5) (P/N 76-100009-010), is comprised of a PCB mounted on an AC/DC switching power module. The switching power supply provides 4 Amps of 24 Vdc power from the 120/ 240 Vac input power. The PCB assembly is a microprocessor-based unit which provides the system with: Battery charging (up to 99 AH) and supervision (low voltage battery cutoff is at 19 Vdc) AC power supervision 24 Vdc supervision Battery load test 24 Vdc ground fault detection (+/-)
The auxiliary 24 Vdc outputs are rated at 1.5 Amp each and can be used to power four-wire type detection devices such as smoke, flame and gas detectors. Note: Outputs must be sized properly to stay within output current limits.
The power supply/charger assembly is addressable and communicates with the CCM over the RS-485 communications bus. The power supply/charger assembly provides terminal connections for an auxiliary power module. This module comes with two different wiring harnesses, as follows: P/N 76-100009-002. Supplied with a 36-inch harness that is meant to connect a main power supply/charger assembly to the auxiliary power module in the main cabinet.
NOTE: SOLDER A 0 OHM, 1/4 W RESISTOR ACROSS W5 WHEN USING 220 VAC POWER.
CAUTION: THE VOLTAGE FOR THE TWO BATTERIES IN SERIES MUST BE GREATER THAN 22 VDC BEFORE CONNECTION TO THE PANEL.
TWO (2) SEALED LEAD-ACID BATTERIES
POWER LIMITED TO 1.5 A DC
POWER LIMITED TO 1.5 A DC
Figure 3-5. Power Supply/Charger Assembly Details

July 2003 3-4 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
P/N 76-100009-003. Supplied with an 8-inch harness to mount a main power supply/charger assembly to an auxiliary power module in a expansion enclosure. The RX/TX modules communicate to the CCM via the multiplexer, located on the motherboard. The CCM identifies each of the installed RX/TX modules by the RS-232 connection on the motherboard. Table 3-1 lists each RX/TX communication connection located on the motherboard and the loop number and addresses assigned to the connected module. See Appendix I for installation details. Table 3-1. Multi-Loop Motherboard Connectors
C ON N E C T OR JP1 JP2 JP3 JP4 JP5 JP6 JP7 JP8 L OOP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 AD D R E S S 1001-1255 2001-2255 3001-3255 4001-4255 5001-5255 6001-6255 7001-7255 8001-8255
The addition of an auxiliary power module to the main power supply/charger assembly will provide an additional 4 Amps of current and make the total available current 8 Amps for this assembly. The system can support up to eight (8) main power supply/charger assemblies with the capability of adding an auxiliary power module to each one to provide a maximum available current of 64 Amps. Each additional power supply/charger assembly (P/N 76-100009010) will need to have a separate address to operate in the system. The auxiliary power module shares the same address as the main power supply/charger assembly that it is connected to. See Appendix I for further installation details. 3-3.4 Multi-Loop Motherboard
The multi-loop motherboard assembly, P/N 76-100017-001, is an assembly which can accept any combination of nine (9) modules consisting of up to eight (8) RX/TX modules and provide connections for up to seven (7) output module circuit board assemblies (see Figure 3-6). The ML motherboard is mounted to standoffs on the back of the main system enclosure. It distributes the system 24 Vdc power, CCM-RX/TX communications and output bus communications to the output modules. The output bus communications are provided by an RJ-12 (flat phone cable) style connection. A single RJ-12 connection connects the ML motherboard to the CCM for RX/TX communications. The 24 Vdc is provided by the system power supply via a two-conductor wiring harness connected to a terminal block (TB11) and is distributed through terminal blocks (TB1-TB8) for connection to RX/TXs. The 24 Vdc, provided by the system power supply via two-conductor wiring connected to terminal block TB-9, is distributed through receptacles for powering output modules.
3-3.5
Signal Output Module
The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of eight (8) Signal Output modules, shown in Figure 3-7, thus providing thirty-two (32) possible signal circuits. Each Signal Output module is equipped with supervised 24 Vdc outputs, which can operate as Class B, Style Y or Class A, Style Z indicating circuits. The module will allow for four (4) Class B or two (2) Class A or a mix of two (2) Class B and one (1) Class A. Each circuit is supervised for open, short and ground fault. Individual outputs can be isolated via the system operator menu.
JP10
RS-232
TB11
RET +24V
TB8
TB7
TB6
TB5
TB4
TB3
TB2
TB1
RS-485
JP9
W1
TB10
JP8
JP7
JP6
JP5
JP4
JP3
JP2
JP1
RET
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
+24V
TB9
Note: If the motherboard is the last device on the RS-485 bus, the W1 jumper remains in place. If the motherboard is not the last device on the RS-485 bus, then it must be removed.
Figure 3-6. Multi-Loop Motherboard, Details

76-100016-001 3-5 July 2003
PEGAsys
2 CLASS A, STYLE "Z
5 6 7 + 8 + 9 10 11 + 12 +
CIRCUIT 1
10K EOR
Reset Switch Trouble LED

SIGNAL AUD 76-100003-001
{ {
Module Address Assignment
CIRCUIT 3
10K EOR
See Note 2 1 CLASS A, STYLE "Z" AND 2 CLASS B, STYLE "Y"

5 6 7 + 8 + 9 10 11 + 12 +
Auxiliary Power NotUsed Sounder Circuits 1-4 TB1
CIRCUIT 1
10K EOR
CIRCUIT 3 CIRCUIT 4
10K EOR
10K EOR
Note 1: See Appendix I for Jumper Configuration (W1-W8). 2: Cut Jumpers W9 & W10 when Auxiliary Power Input is used to remove module from motherboard power bus. 10K EOR 3: Only 8 of this Type Module can be used on the system. Refer to Section 1-2.7, in Chapter 1, for other limitations.
10K EOR 10K EOR
4 CLASS B, STYLE "Y"

5 6 7 + 8 + 9 10 11 + 12 +
2 CLASS B, STYLE "Y" AND 1 CLASS A STYLE "Z

5 6 7 + 8 + 9 10 11 + 12 +
CIRCUIT 1 CIRCUIT 2 10K EOR 10K EOR
CIRCUIT 1 CIRCUIT 2
10K EOR
CIRCUIT 3 CIRCUIT 4 10K EOR
CIRCUIT 3
Figure 3-7. Signal Output Module, Details
The alarm output circuits are polarity reversing type, rated for 24 Vdc signaling devices up to 2.0 Amp maximum per circuit. Careful consideration of alarm strobe in-rush currents has been made to help avoid any potential problems with the increased power requirements in support of the wide range of the ADA/UL 1971 signaling appliances in the marketplace. See Appendix I for installation details. Power for normal standby and alarm operation derives from either of two sources: Primary supply up to its capacity, or Auxiliary power supply input
Time) or Coded (Temporal Pattern) operation. Relation between each signal output and its input source is defined by the panel EOC logic program. In Walk Test mode, the signal output circuit(s) sounds the test signal (if programmed properly). The walk test signal is a 1.0 second pulse, sounded once as each device is activated. 3-3.6 Relay Output Module
Provision for hardwire input of auxiliary power has been made through the use of hardwire connections between the auxiliary power supply and terminals 1 and 2 of the terminal block of the signal module. Output circuits are listed for use in power limited applications. Each circuit can be individually programmed via the PCS program for Continuous, Pulsed 60 or 120 BPM (March-
The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of eight (8) Auxiliary Relay Output cards for up to thirty-two (32) relays . Each Auxiliary Relay Output card (shown in Figure 3-8) is equipped with four (4) Form C, dry contact relay outputs. The ability to isolate an individual relay output is accomplished through the system operator menu. The auxiliary relays are rated for 2.0 Amp @ 30 Vdc and 1.0 Amp @ 120 Vac. See Appendix I for further installation details. Each relay output can be individually programmed via the PCS program for operation. Relation between each relay output and its input source is defined by the panel EOC
3-6 76-100016-001
July 2003
PEGAsys
logic program. In Walk Test mode, the relay output circuit(s) will not operate when the input device(s) under test is activated. Each Agent Release Output Module is equipped with a 24 V, supervised output which is programmable for solenoid-type discharge controls. The installer must select discharge control type required during hardware and software configuration programming. The circuit is supervised for open or ground fault conditions. The ability for individual release output isolate is provided through the system menu. Each card is equipped with supervised signaling outputs for three (3) Class B, Style Y 24 Vdc polarity reversing type indicating circuits. Each signal circuit is supervised for open, short and ground fault conditions. The ability for individual output isolation is provided through the system menus. Careful consideration of alarm strobe in-rush currents has been made. The agent release output circuit is rated for 24 Vdc control devices. Each release output can supervise and activate up to two (2) solenoid control heads. Table 3-2 details all devices approved for operation with the agent release module. Table 3-2. Approved Release Output Devices
Note: A maximum of 8 Relay Output Modules can be used on the system. Refer to paragraph 1-2.7, in Chapter 1, for other limitations.
RELAY 76-100004-001
Manufacturer Kidde-Fenwal Kidde-Fenwal Kidde-Fenwal Kidde-Fenwal Kidde-Fenwal Kidde-Fenwal Various Manufacturers
Solenoids 486500 and 48650001 890181 897494 899175 895630 81-100000-001 FM Groups A, B, D, E and G Sprinkler Solenoids
Figure 3-8. Relay Output Module, Details 3-3.7 Agent Release Output Module
The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of eight (8) agent release output modules, which provide up to eight (8) possible release circuits and twenty-four (24) signal outputs on these modules. (See Figure 3-9.)
Reset Switch Trouble LED

RELEASE 76-100001-001
1
Module Address Assignment
Power for standby and alarm operation of release and signaling outputs shall derive from one of two sources: Primary supply up to its capacity, or Auxiliary power supply input.
See Note 2
Auxiliary Power Release Circuits
TB1
Input of auxiliary power is hard-wired through terminals 1 and 2 on the module's terminal block. Output circuits are Listed for use in Power Limited applications. All signaling power is fully regulated. 3-3.8 City Tie Module
Signal Circuits
12
Note 1: A maximum of 8 of this type module can be used in the system. Refer to paragraph 1-2.7, in Chapter 1, for other limitations. 2: W1 and W2 must be cut when the auxiliary power input is used.
Figure 3-9. Agent Release Output Module, Details
The City Tie Module (Figure 3-10) provides connection and operation for Local Energy or Shunt-type Master Boxes and Reverse Polarity styles of output. The output type is selected by choosing which terminals terminate the field wiring. The module has an amber LED to signify disconnect status. The ability for individual output isolate is provided through the system menus.
76-100016-001
3-7
July 2003
PEGAsys
SILENCE
SCROLL
Note: Only 1 City Tie Module can be connected to the system.
Figure 3-10. City Tie Module, Details Local Energy-Type Output: Monitored output for trip circuit wiring and Master Box coil status (Set/Unset), current limited at 550 mA, 24 Vdc. Monitored for open, short and ground fault. Shunt-Type Output: Unsupervised contact rated at 5.0 Amp, 24 Vdc resistive. Reverse Polarity-Type Output: Unsupervised output for trip circuit wiring only, current limited at 100 mA, 24 Vdc. Reverse Polarity output circuits are listed for use in Power Limited applications. See Appendix I for further installation details. The City Tie Module will operate during the PEGAsys "FailSoft mode. Any system alarm will cause the output to transfer. In Walk Test mode, the city notification outputs shall be disabled. In addition, the output has provisions for manual disable or isolate through the system menu. The initiation of a walk test will create a system trouble, causing the city tie output to transfer to the trouble state. 3-3.9 Remote Display Control Modules
U12
CR2
K2
CR1 K3
K1 C27 1 U13
RV11
R23
CR3
RV12
RV10
E1
R24
RV5
RV7
RV1
C23
E8
R25
R6
R5
R4
R3
E7
E3
E6
E5
E4
E2
C3 1
R43
C10
R33
C9
1 C8 R7
R1 U15 1
U17
C22
U10
U9
R34
Refer to Appendix L for a complete discussion of the PEGAsys Remote Display Control Module and the Remote Display Module. (See Figure 3-11.)
Q4 Q3
R42
U8 1 R26 R28 R27 C17 1 1 R31 C15 R38 C24
Q1 1 Q2 1 U6 R18 ASHLAND, MA 01721 C7
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
Figure 3-13. Network Interface Card

3-8
July 2003
R15
U14
R17
U16
R32
C25
C1
The remote display control modules permit system events to be displayed, and operator intervention to be accomplished, from more than one location in a facility.
R14
R20 R41 R40 U20 1 U19 1
U18 1
1
R21
R2
R36
C2
C18
R13
CITY TIE 76-100002-001
Figure 3-11. RDCM Keypad 3-3.10 ATM Series Driver Modules
The ATM Series Driver Modules permit third-party graphical annunciators and large numbers of auxiliary relays to be used with the PEGAsys Control Unit. Refer to the ATM Series Installation and Operation Manual, Part Number 06-236179-002, for a complete description of the ATM Series Driver Modules.
S2 S1
LK16 LK17 LK32
Out B Out A In B In A
ATM-L/R
W1
LK15
LK14
LK12
+24 V Com PS Flt Earth Gnd A B Trouble Sup. Sil. Out Pre Alm Alarm Pwr On Lamp Test Com Ack Reset Silence Drill
LK10
LK8
LK6
LK4
16 15 LK13 14 13 12 LK11 11 10 9 LK9 8 7 LK7 6 5 4 LK5 3 2 LK3 1

LK1
LK31
LK29
LK27
LK25
LK23
LK21
32 31 30 29 28 27 LK26 26 25 LK24 24 23 22 LK22 21 20 LK20 19 18 17

LK30 LK28 LK18
LK19 LK2
Figure 3-12. ATM Module 3-3.11 Network Interface Card
The Network Interface Card allows multiple PEGAsys Control Units to be combined into an integrated, peer-topeer network for annunciation, event output control, and operator intervention. Refer to Appendix J for a complete discussion of the PEGAsys Network Interface Card and system networking capabilities.
J1 DS4 DS2 DS3 DS1
B2NA2 B1NA1 B2IA2
B1IA1
N2 C26
N1
I2
I1
TB4
TB2
TB3
TB1
K4 RV6 RV4 RV8 RV9 RV2 RV3
R46 R45 C20 U2 1 R10 C13 Y1 C12
U11 GND +5 TP1 TP2 I1 TP3 TP4 TP5 1 U3 C14 U4 TP6 N1 N2 I2
+
U7 C4
R22
C5 C11
U5
1 U21 R44 C16 1 R12 1 R19 R29
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
3-3.12 Field Devices 3-3.14 SmartOne Photoelectric Detector
The SmartOne Series of Intelligent Fire Alarm Devices provides the PEGAsys control system with smoke and heat detection as well as the necessary monitoring and control functions required by advanced fire alarm systems. Each of the SmartOne devices features an intrinsic microprocessor with 4K of nonvolatile memory. Each device constantly monitors its surrounding environment and makes decisions in response to that information. The devices then report status as required to the control panel. Each loop device communicates with the RX/TX module over the PC (power/communications) line. This Distributed Intelligence architecture allows each loop device to make decisions within the monitored area. This unique utilization of processing power makes possible a system of loop devices with greater capacity and flexibility than any typical addressable device system with centralized processing. Each SmartOne device contains a status LED which blinks in various patterns to indicate device status. The blink rates and associated status levels are as follows: Blink Rate 9 Second Rate 2 Second Rate Off (not blinking) Operation Status Normal mode Alarm (activated) Trouble condition
The SmartOne Photoelectric smoke detectors provide true distributed intelligence, addressable, microprocessorbased smoke detection to the PEGAsys system. Model PSD-7152 is an analog, photoelectric type detector, which responds to a broad range of smoldering and flaming type fires. A unique sensing chamber permits 360 of smoke entry and response. Each detector is electronically addressable and can be fully field programmed. Calibration, device address and pre-alarm and alarm sensitivity set points are stored in each detector's nonvolatile memory. SmartOne photoelectric detectors have an unobtrusive low profile look, and are available using the following: 3-3.15 Model PSD 7152 SmartOne Photoelectric Detector: P/N 71-402001-100 SmartOne Heat Detector
The SmartOne heat detectors provide true distributed intelligence, addressable, microprocessor-based heat detection to the PEGAsys system. Model THD-7252 is an analog fixed temperature, thermistor-type detector, which does not respond to rate of rise conditions until its programmed set point is met. Unique algorithms are used to compensate for heat rise without problems associated with false alarms due to elevated rates of rise in ambient temperature. A unique sensing chamber permits 360 of heat entry and response. Each detector is electronically addressable and can be fully field programmed. Calibration, device address, pre-alarm and alarm sensitivity set point are stored in each detector's nonvolatile memory. SmartOne Heat detectors have an unobtrusive low-profile look, and are available using the following: Model THD 7252 SmartOne Heat Detector: P/N 70-404001-100 Addressable Contact Input Device
The following three paragraphs describe each type of available detector. A typical detector is shown in Figure 3-14.
Figure 3-14. Typical Detector 3-3.13 SmartOne Ionization Detector 3-3.16
The SmartOne Ionization smoke detector provides true distributed intelligence, addressable, microprocessor-based smoke detection to the PEGAsys system. Model CPD-7052 is a dual chamber, analog, ionization type detector, which senses both visible and invisible smoke. A unique sensing chamber permits 360 of smoke entry and response. Each detector is electronically addressable and can be fully field programmed. Calibration, device address, pre-alarm and alarm sensitivity set points and drift compensation algorithm are stored in each detector's nonvolatile memory. SmartOne Ionization detectors have an unobtrusive low profile look, and are available using the following: Model CPD 7052 SmartOne Ionization Detector: P/N 70-402001-100
The PEGAsys Contact Monitor (P/N 70-407008-00X) allows an installer the ability to interface typical NO/NC fire alarm devices, such as water flow and tamper switches, to the PEGAsys system. The contact monitor is also used to interface to the Manual Alarm, Manual Release and Abort Stations. The addressable contact monitor device is programmable to report the following events: Alarm (default), Trouble, Manual Alarm, Waterflow Alarm, Manual Release, Abort, Supervisory and Normal (Silent input). Its default setting is Alarm when programmed using the AutoLearn function. (See Figure 3-15.) The unit includes a connection for an optional status LED, which allows the device to indicate its current operating status. In normal standby mode, the LED will flash every nine (9) seconds; in trouble condition, the LED will be extinguished; and when activated, the LED will flash every two (2) seconds.
3-9 July 2003
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Addressable Contact Input Device (NO): P/N 70-407008-001. Addressable Contact Input Device (NC): P/N 70-407008-002.
Typical N.O. Initiating Devices
3-3.18
Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing
The DH-2000 air duct housing is designed for detecting particles of combustion in air handling systems. Upon smoke detection, the system can be programmed to control a variety of devices such as HVAC fans and power shutdown which can prevent unnecessary damage to a facility. The duct housing accepts either the PSD-7152 or CPD7052 smoke detectors. A transparent Lexan cover over the detection chamber allows visual inspection of the duct detector chamber and the internal smoke detector status. Sampling of the air in the duct is accomplished through the use of sampling tubes, which extend into the HVAC duct. (See Figure 3-17.) Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing: P/N 70-403001-100 Model DH-2000 CPDI Air Duct Housing with Ion Detector: P/N 70-403001-052 Model DH-2000 PSDI Air Duct Housing with Photo Detector: P/N 70-403001-152
(+) PC Line (-) In
(+) (-) PC Line Out
EOL (10KW Resistor)
Typical N.C. Supervisory Devices Remote LED (Optional)

1
MAX. INSTALL. TEMP. 120F
FOR SERVICE SEND TO: KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. 400 MAIN ST. ASHLAND, MA 01721 DATE OF MANUFACTURE:
SmartOne TM MODEL AI, N/O CAT. NO. 70-407008-001 SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 06-235578-001
Figure 3-15. Addressable Contact Input Device 3-3.17 Addressable Relay Output Device
The addressable relay output device (P/N 70-408004-001) provides the PEGAsys system with a Form C, dry contact interface for remote control applications. The device connects directly to the RX/TX multiplex loop and contains an SPDT relay for control of auxiliary equipment. The device can be activated through the system EOC or RTC programming. Its default operation programming is done during the AutoLearn function. The unit includes an intrinsic status LED, which allows the device to indicate its current operating status. In normal standby mode, the LED will flash every nine (9) seconds; in trouble condition, the LED will be extinguished; and in activated condition, the LED will flash every two (2) seconds. ( See Figure 3-16.) Addressable Relay Output Device: P/N 70-408004-001
Form C contact rated at: 0.6 A @ 120 Vac 2.0 A @ 30 Vdc (resistive) 1.0 A @ 30 Vdc (inductive)
N/O COM N/C
7 6 5 Field Connections
(+) PC Line In (-)
Figure 3-16. Addressable Relay Output Device

July 2003 3-10 76-100016-001
SmartOne
TM
PC PC PC PC SW SWLED LED (+) (-) (+) (-) A B (+) (-) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PC PC PC PC (+) (-) (+) (-)
N/C
COM
N/O
EOL (10KW Resistor)
Refer to DH-2000 Installation Manual (P/N 06-235398-001) for further details.

ENCLOSURE END PLUG
INLET TUBE (SUPPLY)
OR CTCT TE L0 DU DE DE 0 O-20 MH D
EXHAUST TUBE (MOLDED INTO ENCLOSURE) MTG. SCREW AND O-RING DETECTOR HEAD ION OR PHOTO COVER DETECTOR VIEW PORT
Figure 3-17. DH-2000 Air Duct Housing 3-3.19 Loop Isolator Devices
(+) (-) PC Line Out
The SmartOne series of loop devices offer optional loop isolation, which protects the loop from wire-to-wire short conditions (NFPA 72, Style 7). The isolators will open the loop between two isolators in the presence of a short circuit condition, thus allowing the remainder of the loop to operate normally. However, a trouble indication for the devices affected by the isolation will be created on the panel. The isolators will return to normal operation when the short condition has been removed from the affected wires. (See Figures 3-18, 3-19 and 3-20.)
PEGAsys
The loop isolators are offered in three package styles: Stand-alone style. Housed in a single gang electrical box arrangement. 6-inch Detector Base Mount. Allows the unit to be mounted behind a smoke detector in the 6-inch detector base. Direct mount. Mounts directly onto the RX/TX module. 3-3.20 PEGAsys Addressable Loop Module (PALM)
Used in conjunction with an ORION XT, the PEGAsys Addressable Loop Module permits direct connection of a High-Sensitivity Smoke Detector (HSSD) to the signaling line circuit of the PEGAsys Control Unit. Detailed information about the PALM can be found in the ORION XT installation, operation and maintenance manual, P/N 06-236005-401. (See Figure 3-21.) The PALM allows an HSSD to be monitored like a SmartOne initiating device. Both pre-alarm and alarm signals are reported.
The single gang mount unit includes intrinsic status LEDs which allow the device to indicate in which direction the short condition is being detected. In normal standby mode, the LED will be extinguished and in activated condition, the LED will be on continuously. Loop Isolator RX/TX mount: P/N 74-200012-001 Loop Isolator Stand-alone (Single Gang): P/N 74-200012-002 Loop Isolator 6-inch detector base mount: P/N 74-200012-004
SHORT-1 SHORT-2
400 Main Street Ashland, MA 01721
J1
DS2
DS1
Figure 3-21. PALM Interface Module for ORION XT HSSD The ORION XT HSSD is configured via a computer running ORION Configuration Software (OCS), Version 2.0. All configuration data and smoke history is stored in the ORION XT. OCS may also be used to set the PALM RX/TX loop address. However, if the address is set in this fashion, it must then be 'Registered' at the PEGAsys CCM. PALM loop addresses may also be set from the CCM (default setting is 1000) in the same fashion as other loop modules. Note: 3-3.21 PALM addresses cannot be set via the hand-held programmer (P/N 74-200013-001). Addressable AlarmLine Module
LOOP ISOLATOR RX/TX
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

LISTED
REFER TO INSTALLATION MANUAL P/N 74-200016-001 FOR MODULE INSTALL. PROCEDURES
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
ASHLAND, MA 01721
Figure 3-18. Loop Isolator, RX/TX Mount
The Addressable AlarmLine Module (AAM) permits an AlarmLine sensor cable to be directly interfaced to the PEGAsys Control Unit. Refer to Appendix M for a full description of this Module. (See Figure 3-22.) Figure 3-19. Loop Isolator, Stand-Alone
TM
Underwriters Laboratories
LISTED
Figure 3-20. Loop Isolator, 6-inch Detector Base Mount
Figure 3-22. Addressable AlarmLine Module
76-100016-001
3-11
July 2003
PEGAsys
3-3.22 Addressable Signal/Sounder Module
The Addressable Signal/Sounder Module (ASM) permits notification appliances to be controlled via commands issued from the PEGAsys Control Units signaling line circuit. The ASM is designed to mount in a standard electrical box. Refer to Appendix K for additional details on the Addressable Signal/Sounder Module. (See Figure 3-23.)
PC LINE
TM

+ -
+ -
UL
R
FM
APPROVED
Figure 3-23. Addressable Signal/Sounder Module
July 2003
3-12
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
CHAPTER 4 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

4. Ensure the following LEDs are momentarily lit: 4-1 INTRODUCTION This chapter contains maintenance instructions for the PEGAsys. These procedures should be accomplished on a scheduled basis. In the event that system problems are found during the performance of a procedure, refer to Chapter 5 for corrective action. 4-2 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE AC POWER PRE-ALARM SUPERVISORY 4-3.2 Note: Loop Device Test This test has a pass or fail result. It will not activate alarm outputs on the system. All system outputs must be isolated prior to running this test procedure. ALARM SYSTEM TROUBLE SILENCE
The scheduled maintenance of the system should be performed at an established interval. The interval that the maintenance procedures are performed should not exceed any imposed regulations (NFPA 72 or local codes). 4-3 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The following paragraphs outline general scheduled maintenance procedures to be performed on an as-necessary basis. 4-3.1 Lamp Test
The PEGAsys system provides a unique detector test function, which allows a user to initiate a test of the detection devices through the use of the system menus and verify that the detection device(s) is operating as intended. The test actually stimulates the detection chamber of the device and verifies the response from the device. The CCM will report a result of the test for each device tested. The step-by-step procedure to perform the loop device test follows: Note: Addressable output modules and PALM modules cannot be tested with this procedure.
This test allows the user to check the system display LEDs. The step-by-step procedure to perform the lamp test follows: 1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows: a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD b. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password. c. Press the return () key. Verify that the display reads: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST
1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows: a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD b. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password. c. Press the return () key. Verify that the display reads: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST
2. Press the number four (4) key. Verify that the display reads: 1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES 3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more 3. Press the number two (2) key. Verify that the display reads: START DEVICE TEST TEST DEVICES FROM _ _ _ _TO_ _ _ _ 4. Enter the device address or range of device addresses to be tested, and then press the return button. 5. Verify the display scrolls through each selected address and reads as below: START DEVICE TEST TESTING (Device Address #)
2. Press the number four (4) key. Verify that the display reads: 1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES 3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more 3. Press the number one (1) key. Verify that the display reads: ***LAMP TEST*** ***VERSION XX.X*** Where XX.X corresponds to the CCM Firmware Version.
76-100016-001
4-1
July 2003
PEGAsys
6. When the device testing is completed the display will read: TEST COMPLETED (Address #) TEST (PASSED or FAILED) 7. Press the <SCROLL> button to read the status of each device tested. 4-3.3 Battery Test This test allows the user to activate a battery test to verify battery capacity. The step-by-step procedure to perform the battery test follows: 1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows: a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD b. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password. c. Press the return () key. Verify that the display reads: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST with a time and date stamp. The operator can then print out all walk test results for review. The walk test feature can be deactivated two ways: the service person can deactivate it through the user menus, or the walk test function will time out after ten (10) minutes of non-activation (this ensures system response if the service person is called away for an extended period of time). Note: 4-3.4.1 When the walk test is active, the panel will annunciate a trouble condition. WALK TESTING DETECTORS
Place the system in walk test, as described in Paragraph 4-3.4.2. To place a detector into alarm, perform the applicable procedure below: Smoke DetectorsWhen testing SmartOne smoke detectors, use a "punk-stick" or "cotton wick" to generate smoke. Apply smoke to the detector for a minimum of ten (10) seconds. When a sufficient amount of smoke has entered the device, the control panel will respond with an alarm. The status LED of the detector will flash at a two (2) second rate during the alarm period. Aerosol smoke simulation may be used if acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction, and if the product is used as directed in the instructions. Heat DetectorsWhen testing SmartOne heat detectors, use of a low powered heat gun is acceptable. Heat the detector for a minimum of ten (10) seconds. When a sufficient amount of heat has been detected by the detector, the control panel will respond with an alarm indication. The status LED of the detector will flash at a two (2) second rate during the alarm period. Take care during the heating of the detector to avoid overheating the plastic housing. Maintain a minimum of one (1) foot between the detector and the heat gun nozzle. Use of open flame devices is not recommended as discoloration of the plastic housing is likely, which in turn, creates a potentially hazardous practice. WALK TEST PROCEDURE
2. Press the number four (4) key. Verify that the display reads: 1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES 3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more 3. Press the number three (3) key. Verify that the display reads: BATTERY TEST BATTERY TEST ON PS*_ _ 4. Enter the power supply address which the batteries are connected to. Verify the display reads: BATTERY TEST TEST ACTIVATED ON PS(_ _) 5. Upon the completion of the test the display will read: TEST ON PS(_ _) COMPLETED >_>_ _._V 6. Verify that the voltage is within allowable tolerances. 4-3.4 Walk Test The PEGAsys system provides a one person walk test function. This allows the service person to enable a group of devices for walk test, then proceed through the installation activating the specified devices. The system will respond to each activation with a short burst of the programmed signal circuits. The related signal circuit will only be pulsed if it has been configured for the Walk Test feature when defining it in the PCS software. During the system installation/configuration via PCS, the installer needs to enable each signal circuit installed in the system for Walk Test, if desired. The system's signal outputs default to walk test disabled. When walk test is activated and carried out, the system enters each activation
4-3.4.2
The step-by-step procedure to perform the walk test is as follows: 1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows: a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD b. Type in the Level 2 password. c. Press the return () key. Verify that the display reads: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST
2. Press the number four (4) key. Verify that the display reads: 1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES 3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more
4-2 76-100016-001
July 2003
PEGAsys
3. Press the <SCROLL> button. Verify that the display reads: 4:WALK TEST 5:ALARM SIM TEST 4. Press the number four (4) key. Verify that the display reads: 1:START WALK TEST 2:STOP WALK TEST 5. Press the number one (1) key. Verify that the display reads: START DEVICE WALK TEST WALK TEST STARTED ON LOOP( _ _) 6. After completion of the walk test, press the number two (2) key to disable the walk test mode. 4-3.5 Alarm Simulation Test (AST) The PEGAsys system provides a feature that allows the system installer/inspector to verify the actual output operation in relation to the input(s) that are programmed to activate the output of interest. The service person would enable the AST function for a particular input and the system would operate the output(s) as it is programmed in the Event Output Control program. The system will respond with an alarm condition when the AST feature is enabled. The user would have to disable the AST when output operation has been verified.
! WARNING Any outputs that are controlling critical processes or agent releasing should be physically disconnected from the process or agent container to avoid unwanted shutdowns and/or agent releases. When the AST function is enabled, the pre-programmed outputs for the activated input(s) will activate.
4. Press the <SCROLL> button. Verify that the display reads: 4:WALK TEST 5:ALARM SIM TEST 5. Press the number five (5) key. Verify that the display reads: ALARM SIMULATION TEST DETECTOR ADDRESS _ _ _ _ 6. Type in the selected device address and then press the return key. Verify that the display reads: ALARM SIMULATION TEST 1:ACTIVATE 2:DE-ACTIVATE 7. Press the number one (1) key and then the return key. Verify that the system responds as programmed. 8. Press the <ACKLDGE> button to acknowledge the alarm. 9. Deactivate the AST programming as follows: a. Repeat steps 2 through 8. b. Press number two (2) key and then return (). 4-4 DISARMING AND REARMING RELEASE CIRCUITS
The disarming and rearming procedures which follow must be performed when testing the PEGAsys system. Prior to proceeding, be sure the notes below from NFPA 72, Chapter 10, are understood. Note: 1. IMPORTANT"Testing personnel shall be familiar with the specific arrangement and operation of the suppression system(s) and releasing function(s) and be cognizant of the hazards associated with inadvertent system discharge." "Occupant notification shall be required whenever a fire alarm system configured for releasing service is being serviced or tested." "Discharge testing of suppression systems shall not be required by this code. Suppression systems shall be secured from inadvertent actuation, including disconnection of releasing solenoids/electric actuators, closing of valves, other actions, or combinations thereof, as appropriate for the specific system, for the duration of the fire system testing." "Testing shall include verification that the releasing circuits and components energized or actuated by the fire alarm system are electrically supervised and operate as intended on alarm." "Suppression systems and releasing components shall be returned to their normal condition upon completion of system testing."
4-3.5.1
AST PROCEDURE 2.
The step-by-step procedure to perform the AST follows: 1. Be sure to observe the above warning. 2. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows: a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD b. Type in the Level 2 password. c. Press the return () key. Verify that the display reads: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST
3.
4.
3. Press the number four (4) key. Verify that the display reads: 1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES 3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more 5.
76-100016-001
4-3
July 2003
PEGAsys
4-4.1 Disarming Release Circuits 4-6 4-6.1 POWERING UP THE SYSTEM Power-Up Procedure
Perform the following step-by-step procedure prior to system testing. 1. Isolate all agent release circuits using the system menu (refer to Paragraph 2-5.4.1).
! WARNING
Use safety precautions when removing solenoids to prevent unwanted discharge or activation. 2. Physically remove the control heads or solenoids at the storage containers.
! WARNING
1. Ensure that all control heads or solenoids are disconnected from the storage containers to prevent unwanted discharge or activation. 2. If the system has been powered down, energize the system by performing the following steps: a. Set the circuit breaker for the CCP power to ON. Verify that the display reads "Main Processor Power On". Ensure that the audible device is buzzing continuously. b. Press the display module reset switch. Verify that the audible device is silenced. c. Verify that the display reads as follows: MAIN PROCESSOR POWER ON d. After ten (10) seconds, verify that the display reads as follows: RXTX NON-MONITORING TROUBLE ON RXTX1 Note: The RX/TX message will repeat itself for each RX/ TX module in the system while the system initializes itself. This initialization can take up to 90 seconds.
The suppression system is now fully disarmed from all automatic activation and, in some cases, all manual activation. 3. The system can now be tested without the risk of an inadvertent release of agent. 4-4.2 Arming Release Circuits Perform the following step-by-step procedure upon completion of system testing. 1. Verify that all control heads or solenoids are disconnected from storage containers. 2. Isolate all agent release circuits using the system menu (refer to Paragraph 2-5.4.1). 3. Ensure the system is free of any alarms to prevent unwanted discharge or activation. 4. Reconnect the control heads or solenoids at the storage containers. 5. De-isolate agent release circuit(s). 6. The system is now in full operation in accordance with system programming. 4-5 4-5.1 POWERING DOWN THE SYSTEM Power-Down Procedure
e. Verify that the POWER ON and TROUBLE indicators are lit. f. Connect the backup batteries to the power supply in accordance to the procedure in Chapter 7.
g. Press the <ACKLDGE> button. After approximately one minute the display for each RX/TX will momentarily read: RXTX "N" NON-MONITORING TROUBLE OFF Note: "N" will sequentially correspond to each RX/TX in the system.
The procedure to power-down the system is as follows: 1. Ensure that the panel does not have any active alarms to prevent unwanted discharge or activation. Also ensure that any supervisory or trouble events have been acknowledged.
! CAUTION
h. Verify the display reads the correct time and date. If the incorrect time is displayed, perform step 2.i. i. Set time and date as follows: aa. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD bb. Type in the default first level password (987). cc. Press the return () key. Verify that the display reads: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST
If alarms do exist during power-down, powerup of the panel will cause a reactivation of the alarm sequence and possible activation of the suppression system. 2. Disarm release circuits as per Paragraph 4-4.1. 3. Remove DC power first by disconnecting the batteries. 4. Remove AC power second by shutting off the circuit breaker to the panel.
July 2003 4-4
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
dd. Type in 3111 on the keypad. Verify that the display reads: SYSTEM TIME (AM/PM) ENTER THE TIME _ _ : _ _ (HH:MM) ee. Type in the time (HH=hours 0-12 and then MM=minutes 0-59). Press the return key. Verify that the display reads: SYSTEM TIME (AM/PM) 1:AM 2:PM ff. Type in appropriate selection (1 for AM or 2 for PM). gg. Set the date in an analogous procedure, as in steps dd and ee above. 3. Rearm release circuit per Paragraph 4-4.2.
76-100016-001
4-5
July 2003
PEGAsys
July 2003
4-6
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-1 INTRODUCTION 5-3 TROUBLESHOOTING
The effectiveness of this chapter is greatly increased by first reading the entire manual. The service technician must have a sure understanding of the purpose and correct function of the module/device before attempting corrective maintenance. This chapter contains instructions to aid a technician in locating faulty modules/devices. This chapter also provides instructions for the removal and replacement of the replaceable modules/devices of the PEGAsys system.
! WARNING
The PEGAsys system utilizes internal programming for continuous system testing. Most system faults can be isolated through the operation of the front panel. Users/technicians can initiate various testing via the use of the system menu (refer to Paragraph 2-5) after entering a valid password. Table 5-1. Troubleshooting Index
Module/Device Central Control Module Receiver/Transmitter Module Power Supply Module Multi-Loop Motherboard Basic Motherboard Signal Output Module Detailed Illustration 3-3 3-4 3-5 1-7 and 3-6 1-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 3-16 3-17 3-18 thru 3-20 3-21 3-22 Functional Description Paragraph 3-3.1 3-3.2 3-3.3 1-2.6 and 33.4 1-2.5 3-3.5 3-3.6 3-3.7 3-3.8 3-3.9 3-3.10 3-3.11 3-3.12 3-3.16 3-3.17 3-3.18 3-3.19 3-3.20 3-3.21 See Manual 77.100 Appendix M 7-5 7-7.1 7-7.2 7-7.3 7-7.4 Appendix L Manual P/N 06-236179-002 Appendix J 5-4.4 7-15 7-16 See Manual Replacement Procedure 5-4.2 5-4.3 7-7.5 and 7-7.6
All service to panel must be done with panel powered down to prevent damage to panel components, personnel injury, or both. 5-2 STANDARD FAULT-ISOLATION TECHNIQUES
Failure of the PEGAsys system to function properly will usually be caused by one or more of the following faults: Failure of the power supply Damaged or faulty wiring Component failure
Relay Output Module Agent Release Module City Tie Module Remote Display Modules ATM Series Driver Modules Network Interface Card Field Device Addressable Contact Input Device Addessable Relay Output Device Air Duct Housing Loop Isolators PALM for use with ORION XT HSSD Addressable AlarmLine Module Addressable Signal/Sounder Module
When a failure occurs and the cause is not known, check as many of these items as is practical before starting a detailed check. If possible, obtain information about any changes taking place that may affect the system. 5-2.1 Visual Inspection
When troubleshooting, the fault may often be discovered through visual inspection alone. Some faults, such as shorted transformers or wiring, can be located by sight or smell. Check for smoke or the odor of burned or overheated parts. Look for loose connections. Visual inspection is also useful in avoiding damage to the system which could occur through improper servicing methods. See Table 5-1, Troubleshooting Index, and the paragraphs of this chapter for troubleshooting beyond visual inspection. 5-2.2 Power Checks
Many faults on the system can be caused by problems with power. Ensure battery and line voltages are checked prior to troubleshooting the system.
3-23
3-3.22
Appendix K
76-100016-001
5-1
July 2003
PEGAsys
5-4 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT 1. Disconnect plug from terminal T1. 2. Remove the two mounting screws from the module and move module to gain access to connected wiring. 3. Remove the plug from the RS-232 port. 4. Remove power plug from connector jack J1. 5. Remove new RX/TX module from packing and inspect for physical damage. 6. Ensure jumper configuration is set. 7. Install new RX/TX in the reverse order of the removal steps (listed above).
The following paragraphs provide required tools and stepby-step replacement procedures for the PEGAsys. The procedures should also be used to assist in module and device installation.
! CAUTION
Some components are subject to damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD). These components are not to be removed from their protective wrappings until they are to be installed in their respective equipment locations, and then only by personnel connected to earth ground. 5-4.1 Required Tools
The following tools will be required to perform the removal and replacement procedures. Small Flat-Blade Screwdriver 6" Flat-Blade Screwdriver No. 2 cross-head Screwdriver Wire Stripper Small Needle Nose Pliers Ground Strap Central Control Module Figure 5-1. Single Loop Installation
5-4.2
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure for replacing the CCM. 1. Ensure all programming is saved using PCS software. 2. Remove all field wiring and internal cables. 3. Remove the six mounting screws while holding the CCM in place. 4. Remove CCM from cabinet. 5. Remove new CCM from packing and inspect for physical damage. 6. Install new CCM in the reverse order of the removal steps (listed above). 5-4.3 RX/TX Module
LE I/O DU MO
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure for replacing the RX/TX module. Depending on the system configuration. (See Figure 5-1 or 5-2.) Ensure that the RX/TX jumpers are set properly during the procedure. Verify that the settings of the jumpers on the RX/TX Module conform to the wiring style of the system being installed. The RX/TX is shipped from the factory programmed for Style 6 wiring style. See Appendix I for the jumper locations on the RX/TX module. The settings are used to set the wiring style ( 4, 6 or 7), with 7 being used with loop isolators. Jumpers on the RX/TX Module are noted by JP x and Wx (x = a single digit) call-outs on the module board. Table 5-2 lists the types of allowable configurations you can select along with their respective jumpers.
July 2003 5-2
/TX RX DULE MO
Figure 5-2. Multi-Loop Installation
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Table 5-2. RX/TX Configuration Selection
Jumper Style 4 Style 6 Style 6 w/ Loop Isolator Shorted Open Open Style 7
W1 and W2 JP2 JP3
Open Shorted Shorted
Shorted Shorted Shorted
Shorted Open Open
Note:
Style 7 requires the use of field-installed loop isolators. The RX/TX module requires the use of one (1) P/N 74-200012-001 isolator module to operate in the Style 7 configuration. Field Devices
5-4.4
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure to replace field devices in the PEGAsys system. Note: Smoke and heat detectors can be replaced without powering down the system. When adding new loop devices to the system, the panel will need to be powered down. If device is in alarm, the alarm must be cleared prior to removal from the system. If the alarm cannot be cleared, physically remove the device from the system, acknowledge all current system events and power down the system to re-initialize it. Once the system is online, insert the replacement device onto the loop. 1. 2. 3. 4. Identify the defective device to be replaced. Remove the defective device from the PC Line. Record the model number and device type. Ensure the new device is an exact replacement. Verify that the model number is the same as the defective device. 5. Set the address of the new device to the same as the defective device using the procedure in Paragraph 2-8.6. 6. Connect the new device to the PC Line where the defective device was removed, if not accomplished in the previous step. Use the same detector base or electrical box of the defective device. 7. Perform the appropriate test listed below: Loop Device Test (Paragraph 4-3.2) for Detection Devices. Walk Test (Paragraph 4-3.4.2) for AI or automatic initiating device.
76-100016-001
5-3
July 2003
PEGAsys
July 2003
5-4
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
CHAPTER 6 PARTS LIST

6-1 INTRODUCTION
The PEGAsys system parts list (Table 6-1) provides a list of all repair parts. Table 6-1. PEGAsys System Parts List NOMENCLATURE SYSTEMS PEGAsys Control Unit (includes CCM with one RX/TX Module, one Power Supply/ Charger Assembly and Enclosure) PEGAsys Multi-Loop Control Unit (includes CCM with one Multi-Loop Motherboard, one RX/TX Module, one Power Supply/Charger Assembly and Enclosure) MAIN SYSTEM COMPONENTS Central Control Module (CCM), Single-Loop Central Control Module (CCM), Multi-Loop Power Supply/Charger Assembly, includes 4 Amp. Power Supply RX/TX Module for Single Loop System RX/TX Module for Multi-Loop System Main Enclosure MODULES Agent Release Module Signal Output Module Relay Output Module City Tie Module Motherboard for eight (8) Optional Output Modules Multi-Loop Motherboard for up to eight (8) RX/TX or seven (7) Output Modules Network Interface Card Remote Display Control Module Remote Display Module ATM-L Annunciator Driver Board ATM-R Relay Driver Board POWER SUPPLIES Power Supply Module, 4 Amp., including 36" Wiring Harness (for main cabinet) Power Supply Module, 4 Amp., including 8" Wiring Harness (for expansion cabinet) 76-100009-002 76-100009-003 76-100001-001 76-100003-001 76-100004-001 76-100002-001 76-100007-001 76-100017-001 76-100036-500 76-300000-502 76-300000-501 76-200004-032 76-200005-032 76-100008-501/ 76-100008-701 76-100008-600/ 76-100008-800 76-100009-010 76-100005-001 76-100005-002 76-100000-502 76-100000-501 76-100000-600 PART NUMBER
76-100016-001
6-1
July 2003
PEGAsys
Table 6-1. PEGAsys System Parts List (Continued) NOMENCLATURE ADDITIONAL COMPONENTS PEGAsys Expansion Enclosure (order backplane separately) Expansion Backplane, for Mounting Motherboard and four (4) Power Supplies Expansion Backplane, for Mounting eight (8) Power Supplies Expansion Backplane, for Mounting two (2) I/O Motherboards Battery Enclosure for Additional Batteries Battery 12 V, 17 AH Battery 12 V, 33 AH Battery 12 V, 12 AH SMARTONE FIELD DEVICES Intelligent Photoelectric Detector, Model PSD-7152 Intelligent Ionization Detector, Model CPD-7052 Intelligent Thermal Detector, Model THD-7252 6-inch Universal Detector Base, Model 6SB 4-inch Universal Detector Base, Model 4SB Addressable Contact Input Device (N.O.) Addressable Contact Input Device (N.C.) Addressable Loop Module for ORION XT Addressable Relay Output Device Loop Isolator1 Gang Box Mounted Loop IsolatorDetector Base Mounted Loop IsolatorRXTX Mounted Alarm Signal/Sounder Module Addressable AlarmLine Module Addressable AlarmLine Module in NEMA-4 Enclosure DUCT HOUSING AND COMPONENTS DH-2000 Duct Housing without Detector Installed DH-2000 PSDIDuct Housing with Photoelectric Detector Installed DH-2000 CPDIDuct Housing with Ionization Detector Installed Sampling Tube12", The number of sampling holes vary with tube length. Order sampling tubes that approximate duct width. Sampling Tube24" Sampling Tube48" Sampling Tube72" Sampling Tube96" Sampling Tube120" Exhaust Tube Kit
6-2
PART NUMBER
76-100000-505 76-100000-006 76-100000-007 76-100000-008 76-100010-001 06-115915-046 89-100052-001 06-115915-047 71-402001-100 70-402001-100 70-404001-100 70-400001-100 70-400001-101 70-407008-001 70-407008-002 77-297103-000 70-408004-001 74-200012-002 74-200012-004 74-200012-001 70-200200-001 73-100001-001 73-100003-001
70-403001-100 70-403001-152 70-403001-052 06-129500-001 06-129500-002 06-129500-003 06-129500-004 06-129500-005 06-129500-006 06-129554-001
July 2003
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Table 6-1. PEGAsys System Parts List (Continued) NOMENCLATURE MISCELLANEOUS Handheld Device Programmer 6-Conductor Telephone Cable with DB25 Adapter (DTE) for Computers and Terminals 6-Conductor Telephone Cable with DB25 Adapter (DCE) for Modems 6-Conductor Telephone Cable with DB9 Adapter (DTE) for Laptop Computers DB25 Adapter (DTE) for Computers and Terminals (use with 6-Conductor Telephone Cable) DB25 Adapter (DCE) for Modems (use with 6-Conductor Telephone Cable) DB9 Adapter (DTE) for Laptop Computer PCS Version 7.X Software PCS Version 8.X Software (for use with ORION XT Detectors) 74-200013-001 74-100016-001 74-100016-002 74-100016-003 06-129341-001 06-129317-003 06-129373-001 76-100035-002 76-100040-001 PART NUMBER
76-100016-001
6-3
July 2003
PEGAsys
July 2003
6-4
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
CHAPTER 7 INSTALLATION
18"
7-1
INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides information necessary to install the PEGAsys system. Installation consists of installing a complete system. The procedures in this chapter should be accomplished by technicians familiar with fire alarm system installation and the requirements of relevant NFPA regulations. 7-2 MATERIALS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION
28"
25.375"
The materials listed below are not supplied with the system, but are required for installation: 7-3 No. 10 or -inch Mounting Hardware Electrical Conduit for AC Input Power 4-inch Electrical Junction Boxes (as required) Wire-Nuts and Crimp-On Terminals (as required) Ground Strap (for handling printed circuit boards) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR CENTRAL CONTROL PANEL Figure 7-1. CCP Installation Drawing With the enclosure held by the top two screws, place the bottom two mounting screws in place. Tighten the screws. Reinstall the enclosure door at this time. Care must be taken when installing the door to ensure that the hinge pins are lined up correctly. 7-4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR EXPANSION ENCLOSURES
(FLOOR) 16" 44"
The PEGAsys Central Control Panel enclosure is 28 inches high x 18 inches wide x 5 inches deep. It is designed to be surface or semi-flush mounted using No. 10 or -inch hardware. The type of hardware to be used is at the discretion of the installer, but must be in accordance with good electrical and safety practices. Figure 7-1 shows the hole layout of the enclosure mounting area. The lower set of mounting holes should typically be 44 inches from the floor in order for the display panel to be at a convenient viewing height. To facilitate mounting the enclosure to its wall position, remove the enclosures front door. Disconnect the ground wire before removing the door. To remove the front door, open the door approximately 90 from its closed position and lift it up enough to allow the doors hinge pins to clear their mating hinge sockets located on the left side of the Central Control Panel. Place the mounting screws into the top two holes in the wall. Leave approximately -inch of both screws exposed. Carefully place the two key holes over the screws in the wall. Ensure the enclosure has its door hinge sockets located to the left as you face the enclosure. Allow the enclosure to gently come to rest on the screws. Tighten the screws.
76-100016-001 7-1
The expansion enclosure (P/N 76-100000-505) uses a backplate installed in the enclosure to meet various system component requirements. The expansion enclosure maintains the same outside dimensions as the main system enclosure. There are three versions of the backplate: An output module cardcage with mounting provisions for up to four (4) power supplies Mounting provisions for up to eight (8) power supplies Two motherboard cardcages for mounting up to sixteen (16) output modules in the expansion enclosure.
The optional output motherboard and output modules must be installed prior to the system being powered up. The output bus (communications) and 24 Vdc power are attached to connectors located on the output motherboard. Note: The internal communications bus (RS-485) wiring must be enclosed in a raceway from the main enclosure for a maximum run of 20 feet, with expansion enclosures located in the same room as the main enclosure.
July 2003
PEGAsys
Figure 7-2, shows the expansion backplate which provides mounting for four (4) power supplies and one (1) output motherboard. Figure 7-3 shows the expansion backplate which provides mounting for up to eight (8) auxiliary power supplies. Figure 7-4 shows the expansion backplate which provides mounting for two (2) output motherboards. To install, position the back plate in the enclosure and fasten it to the seven studs located in the enclosure using the nuts supplied with the enclosure.
MOTHER BD CCM
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
TBL RELAY
= Back Plate Mounting Studs (7 Locations)
Figure 7-2. Back Plate, Output Motherboard and Four Power Supplies
Figure 7-3. Back Plate, Eight Power Supplies

7-2
06-129562-001
RET 24V RET
NO
NC
A W4 S2 S1 2 1 2 1 S3
DS1
24V
RET
SHR
AC OUT 1 2 AC IN DC IN 1
L N N L
L G
AUX 1 AUX 2 06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2
24V
W1
TB8
TB9
TP3
TP4 F1
RET
24V
RET
SHR
+ -
24V
RET
RET
24V
24V
MOTHER BD CCM
RET
SYSTEM POWER
BAT
DC IN 2
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
TBL RELAY
NO
NC
A W4 S2 S1 2 1 2 1 S3
DS1
24V
RET
SHR RET 24V RET
L N N L L
24V
W1
TB8
TB9
TP3
TP4 F1
RET
24V
RET
SHR
+ -
24V
RET
RET
24V
24V
MOTHER BD CCM
RET
SYSTEM POWER
BAT
DC IN 2
Figure 7-4. Back Plate, Two Output Motherboards 7-5 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OUTPUT MOTHERBOARD
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure to install an output motherboard into a single-loop system. 1. Place motherboard on standoffs in the back of the enclosure. 2. Insert and tighten the twelve (12) mounting screws provided with the motherboard. 3. Connect the 24 Vdc wiring from the power supply to terminal TB1. 4. Connect the RJ-12 phone style wire from the MOTHER BD connector (on the power supply) to J9 on the motherboard. 7-6 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR RX/TX MODULE (MULTI-LOOP ONLY)

A B
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
TBL RELAY
NO NC C
06-129562-001
RET 24V RET
W4 DS1 S2 2 1 S1 2 1 S3
24V
RET
SHR
L N N L
L G
AUX 1 AUX 2 06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2 06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2 06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2
24V
W1
TB8
TB9
TP3
TP4 F1
RET
RET
24V
SHR
MOTHER BD CCM
RET
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
24V

A W4 S2 S1 2 1 2 1 S3 B
+ BAT
DC IN 2
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
TBL RELAY
NO NC C
DS1
24V
RET
SHR RET 24V RET
L N N L L
24V
W1
TB8
TB9
TP3
TP4 F1
RET
RET
24V
SHR
MOTHER BD CCM
RET
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
24V

A W4 S2 S1 2 1 2 1 S3 B
+ BAT
DC IN 2
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
TBL RELAY
NO NC C
DS1
24V
RET
SHR RET 24V RET
AC OUT 1 2
L N N L
24V
W1
TB8
TB9
TP3
TP4 F1
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure for installing an RX/TX module. Refer to Figure 7-5. Ensure the RX/TX jumpers are set properly during the procedure. Verify that the settings of the jumpers on the RX/ TX Module conform to the wiring style of the system being installed. The RX/TX is shipped from the factory programmed for Style 6 wiring style. See Appendix I for jumper locations on the RX/TX module. The settings are used to set the wiring style (4, 6 or 7), 7 being used with loop iso-
L G
AC IN DC IN 1
R
MOTHER BD CCM
RET 24V RET 24V
SYSTEM POWER
R
RET RET 24V SHR RET 24V

A W4 S2 S1 2 1 2 1 S3 B
+ BAT
DC IN 2
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
TBL RELAY
NO NC C
DS1
24V
RET
SHR RET 24V RET
L N N L L
24V
W1
TB8
TB9
TP3
TP4 F1
RET
RET
24V
SHR
RET
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
24V
+ BAT
DC IN 2
July 2003
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
lators. Jumpers on the RX/TX Module are noted by JP x and Wx (x = a single digit) call-outs on the module board. Table 7-1 lists the types of allowable configurations you can select along with their respective jumpers. Note: Since the RX/TXs are not addressed by switches, the communications socket they are connected to will become their address. Example: An RX/TX connected to JP1 on the multi-loop motherboard will become RX/TX 1, Loop 1. If the same RX/TX was moved to JP4, the address would become RX/TX 4, Loop 4. INSTALLATION OF OUTPUT MODULES
7-7
LE I/O DU MO
/TX RX DULE MO
The output modules can be inserted into the motherboard in any order. The CCM automatically reads the output modules type and address upon PCS configuration upload. However, it is recommended that modules performing like functions be placed adjacent to each other to facilitate identification and field wiring runs. After powering up the system, a list of output module assignments can be requested from the system menu to verify the registration and accuracy of module address(es).
! CAUTION
Figure 7-5. Installation for Multi-Loop Table 7-1. RX/TX Configuration Selection
Jumper Style 4 Style 6 Style 6 w/Loop Isolator Shorted Open Open Style 7
W1 and W2 JP2 JP3
Open Shorted Shorted
Shorted Shorted Shorted
Shorted Open Open
Note:
Style 7 requires the use of field-installed loop isolators. The RX/TX module requires the use of one (1) P/N 74-200012-001 isolator module to operate in Style 7 configuration.
All personnel installing or servicing PEGAsys equipment must wear a grounding strap when working in the Central Control panel to avoid generating static electricity which can destroy integrated circuits. Output module printed circuit boards are shipped in antistatic plastic bags and should be kept in these bags until they are installed. When the circuit boards are removed from the motherboard, they should be replaced into the appropriate bags. NEVER PACK THESE BOARDS IN STYROFOAM OR PLASTIC PELLETS.
! WARNING Output modules should never be installed in a powered-up system. Always disconnect both AC and battery power before installing or removing modules.
1. Remove RX/TX module from packing and inspect for physical damage. 2. Ensure jumper configuration is set. Refer to Table 7-1 settings for wiring styles. 3. Install loop isolator, P/N 74-200012-001, if used. 4. Connect 24 Vdc wiring from terminal block (TB1-TB8) to 24 Vdc input plug J1. The terminal block which will be used to power the RX/TX will be dependant upon which slot the RX/TX will be installed into. 5. Install the short, 6-conductor cable from the RS-232 port on the RX/TX to the appropriate RJ-12 sockets JP1-JP8. The socket selected is dependant upon which slot the RX/TX will be installed into. 6. Place the RX/TX against the mounting bracket in the PEGAsys, adjacent to its communications socket JP1 to JP8. Install the two mounting screws and tighten until snug. 7. Remove the RX/TX by reversing the installation steps (listed above).
To remove an output module from the system, remove all power, remove terminal block from module, remove the two (2) mounting screws and pull out the module. The following paragraphs describe the installation procedure for each available output module type. 7-7.1 Signal Audible Output Module
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure to install a signal audible output module into the PEGAsys system. 1. Remove the signal audible output module from packing and inspect for physical damage. 2. Set address switches. See Appendix I for address switch settings. 3. Set jumpers W1-W3 for appropriate A/B wiring styles. See Appendix I for jumper settings.
76-100016-001
7-3
July 2003
PEGAsys
4. Cut jumper between W9 and W10 if using an auxiliary 24 Vdc power input. 5. Install module into the motherboard. Ensure the connector mates properly. 6. Insert and tighten mounting screws. Refer to Figure 51 or 5-2. 7-7.2 Relay Output Module The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure to install a relay output module into the PEGAsys system. 1. Remove the relay output module from packing and inspect for physical damage. 2. Set address switches. See Appendix I for address switch settings. 3. Install module into the motherboard. Ensure the connector mates properly. 4. Insert and tighten mounting screws. Refer to Figure 5-1 or 5-2. 7-7.3 Agent Release Module
MAIN POWER SUPPLY (76-100009-010)
1. Remove the power supply/charger assembly from packing and inspect for physical damage. 2. Set address switches. See Appendix I for address switch settings. 3. See Figure 7-6 to determine the wiring connections between the switching power supply (Aux. Power Supply) and monitor module (Main Power Supply). 4. See Appendix I for jumper settings. 5. Install module in the desired position on the backplate of the main or expansion enclosure. 6. Insert and tighten the four mounting screws/nuts into the four corners of the mounting plate.
WHT BLK/WHT ORN RED RED BLK BLK VIO
SPV RET 24V
L
attribute ?
N
attribute ?
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure to install an agent release module into the PEGAsys system. 1. Remove the agent release module from packing and inspect for physical damage. 2. Set address switches. See Appendix I for address switch settings. 3. Set switches S3 and S4 for solenoid activation. See Appendix I for switch settings. 4. Cut jumper between W1 and W2 if using an auxiliary 24 Vdc power input. 5. Install module into the motherboard. Ensure the connector mates properly. 6. Insert and tighten mounting screws. Refer to Figure 5-1 or 5-2. 7-7.4 City-Tie Output Module The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure to install a city tie output module into the PEGAsys system. 1. Remove the city-tie module from packing and inspect for physical damage. 2. Set module configuration. See Appendix I. 3. Install module in the motherboard. Ensure the connector mates properly. 4. Insert and tighten mounting screws. Refer to Figure 5-1 or 5-2. 7-7.5 Power Supply/Charger Assembly The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure to install a power supply/charger assembly into the PEGAsys system.
AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (76-100009-002)
Figure 7-6. Power Supply/Charger Wiring Diagram 7-7.6 Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Expansion Enclosure
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure to install a power supply/charger assembly into the expansion enclosure. 1. Remove the power supply/charger assembly from packing and inspect for physical damage. 2. Set address switches. See Appendix I for address switch settings. 3. See Figure 7-7 to determine the wiring connections between the switching power supply (Aux. Power Supply) and monitor module (Main Power Supply). 4. See Appendix I for jumper settings. 5. Install module in the desired position on the backplate of the expansion enclosure.
July 2003
7-4
attribute ?
attribute ?
24V
RET
SPV
AC OUT 2 1
attribute ?
AC IN
DC IN 1
attribute ? attribute ?
SHARE
DC IN 2
WHT BLK/WHT BLK BLK VIO RED RED ORN
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
AC OUT 1 2 AC IN
attribute ?
L N L
WHT BLK/WHT
attribute ?
MAIN POWER SUPPLY (76-100009-010)
attribute ?
24V RET
attribute ?
SPV
SHARE
attribute ?
24V RET
ORN RED RED BLK BLK VIO
AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (76-100009-003)
attribute ?
Figure 7-7. Power Supply/Charger Wiring Diagram for Expansion Enclosure
6. Insert and tighten the four mounting screws into the four corners of the mounting plate. Table 7-2. Aux. Power Supply Module Connections to Main Power Supply/Charger Assembly
Aux. Pow er Supply White Black/White Red Black Violet Orange Function AC Input (Neutral) AC Input (Hot) DC Output (Pos.) DC Output (Neg.) Supervision Share Main Supply AC Out 2 N AC Out 2 L DC In 2 24V DC In 2 Ret DC In 2 Supv Share
attribute ?
SPV
N G
DC IN 1 DC IN 2
Figure 7-8. This connection must be daisy-chained to other power supplies in the expansion enclosure, if installed. Jumper W4 must be removed from all power supplies in line, and all in-line motherboard terminating jumpers must also be removed, except from the last power supply unit or motherboard in the expansion enclosure. This will maintain the terminating resistor at the end of the RS-485 circuit, which is required to ensure proper operation of the RS-485 communications. Loop the RS-485 wiring. Do not use T-tapping.
Figure 7-8. RS-485 Connection 7-8 CONNECTING AC POWER
7-7.7
Power Supply Communication Connections
The main power supply communicates with the CCM over the internal RS-485 bus of the PEGAsys system, and can be connected in different ways. The power supply unit in the main enclosure of the PEGAsys system communicates with the CCM over a short phone style cable. The bus extends out of the power supply when needed, i.e., to a motherboard or other power supply installed in an expansion enclosure. These two examples are accomplished as follows: 1. Power supply in main enclosure to motherboard in main enclosure: a flat 6-conductor phone type cable is attached to CON 2 of power supply and then inserted into the RJ-12 jack on the motherboard labeled RS485. Remove jumper W4 on the main power supply to enable the terminating resistor on the motherboard. The terminating resistor is used to ensure good RS485 communications. 2. Power supplies installed in an expansion enclosure without a motherboard can use the RS-485 terminal block (TB1). This connection allows the installer to connect a twisted-pair, 18 AWG cable to terminals A and B of TB1 on the power supply in the main enclosure and connect to the same terminals on the power supply in the expansion enclosure, as shown in
76-100016-001 7-5
AC power must be provided to the Central Control Panels internal power supply using three conductors. The AC power cable is to be run through a conduit from a dedicated, 15 Amp circuit breaker. The conduit must be attached to the right side of the Central Control Panel enclosure through one of the knockouts near the upper right corner of the enclosure. See Appendix A for AC branch circuit requirement details.
! WARNING
High voltages may be present when connecting AC power to the Central Control Panel. Suitable precautions must be taken to avoid injury. Note: All Non-Power-Limited wiring must be routed away from Power Limited wiring by a minimum of inch, per NFPA and UL requirements. For Power Limited Circuits use Type FPL, FPLP or FPLR cable per NEC Article 760.
Ensure that the circuit breaker at the dedicated AC power source is in the OFF position. Attach the three AC power conductors to TB1 on the Central Control Panel power supply PCB (see Appendix I).
July 2003
PEGAsys
7-9 INSTALL AND CONNECT DC POWER
! CAUTION
Space is provided within the Central Control Panel for two 12 V, 33 AH sealed lead-acid batteries used for 24-hour standby operation. 7-9.1 Battery Enclosure
Do not connect the batteries to the system power supply at this time. Connect the batteries at the end of system installation. Connection to the power supply must be according to the instructions in Appendix I. 7-10 FIELD DEVICE CONNECTION TO RX/TX MODULE
A separate UL Listed battery enclosure, shown in Figure 7-9 (P/N 76-100010-001), is used to house up to two 12 V, 40 AH, sealed lead-acid batteries. The enclosure is designed to be surface mounted using only hardware similar to that used on the CCP (see Paragraph 7-3) and must be mounted within 100 feet of the panel. Note: Wiring for the batteries to the power supply must be sized accordingly to prevent unacceptable voltage drops. Batteries
7-9.2
Refer to Appendix A for required system power calculations. Refer to Appendix E for FM Pre-Action/Deluge sprinkler requirements for 90-hour standby periods. Recommended battery manufacturers and models are: Standby Time 24 Hours 60 Hours 90 Hours Battery Panasonic LCR 12 V 17AP,17 AH (P/N 06-115915-046) Power Sonic 12330, 33 AH (2 sets) (P/N 89-100052-001) Power Sonic 12330, 33 AH (3 sets) (P/N 89-100052-001)
Field devices connect to terminal block (TB1) located on the PEGAsys Systems Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/ TX). The cable connecting the field devices to the RX/TX module provides power and bi-directional communications to the loop devices. One RX/TX module can support up to 255 SmartOne addressable field devices. These 255 addresses can be any mixture of intelligent loop device inputs and outputs without restriction. Note: All Non-Power Limited wiring must be routed away from Power Limited wiring by a minimum of inch, per NFPA and UL requirements. For Power Limited Circuits use Type FPL, FPLP or FPLR cable per NEC Article 760. Wiring the RX/TX PC Line
7-10.1
The RX/TX PC line uses Broadcast Indexing Protocol (BIP) for communications with intelligent loop devices. The PC Line may be configured in NFPA-72 Style 4, 6 or 7. The PC Line is capable of supporting 255 intelligent loop devices on a 2-wire loop. In retrofit applications, existing wiring can be used as long as it meets NEC 760 and NFPA 72 requirements. When installing new wiring or using existing wiring, it is necessary to check line resistance and capacitance. Total line resistance cannot be greater than 26 Ohms, and capacitance can not exceed 0.25 microFarad. Kidde recommends the use of No. 18 AWG minimum twisted, unshielded, lowcapacitance fire alarm wiring as the connection cable between the RX/TX Module and the field devices. See Appendix H for recommended wiring. The PC line to the loop devices can be run in conduit to the Central Control Panel cabinet. The conduit, if used, must be attached through any convenient Central Control Panel enclosure knockout. Route the connection cable to TB1 on the RX/TX PCB and insert the end of each connection cable wire into its proper TB1 slot. Tighten the slot screws firmly. See Figure 7-10 for a conduit to CCP example.
Twisted, Unshielded Wire
TB1
The batteries should be rated for standby power use and fit within the physical dimensions of the respective enclosure. The batteries must have terminals that accept standard ring-type solderless connectors. (See Figure 7-9.)
VENT BOTH SIDES KNOCKOUTS FOR .50 CONDUIT (3 PLACES)
DOOR
0.94
10 0.94 18
12
20
8.25
RX/TX Module
Figure 7-9. Battery Enclosure
Enclosure
Figure 7-10. Conduit to CCP

July 2003 7-6 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
In retrofit applications where existing wiring will be used, do not exceed the SLC resistance and capacitance limitations listed above. All conduit and conductors must meet NEC, NFPA-72 and any applicable local code requirements. See Figure 7-11 for existing shielded cable termination. Optionally, the PC line can be installed in a separate conduit as shown previously, thus allowing the PC line to use twisted, unshielded wire.
Grounding Nut Shielded Wire
TB1
In the Style 6 wiring configurations, the RX/TX automatically transmits data and power bi-directionally when a break in the PC line wiring occurs. If the break is in a single conductor, all loop devices will remain fully operational. For Style 6 PC line connections, if a PC line open trouble is encountered, use the system reset switch on the display and control board to reset the PC line to normal once the fault is corrected.
Addressable Contact Input Device
SmartOne TM
Enclosure
RX/TX Module
Figure 7-11. Shielded Wire to CCP Note: All new RCUs are shipped from Kidde with their address set to 000. This address is reserved for unregistered devices and cannot be used as a registered address. The unaddressed devices must be connected to the RX/TX Module one at a time in order to address them. Otherwise devices may be pre-addressed or multiple pre-addressed loop devices may be connected to the RX/TX PC line at the same time using the hand-held device programmer (P/N 74-200013-001) .
Detector Bases
TB1 of RX/TX Module
Refer to Table 7-1 for a list of the types of allowable configurations that can be selected, along with the respective jumper settings for those configurations. As described in this chapter, the PC line can be configured in Style 4, 6 or 7. See Figures 7-12 through 7-15. Style 4 configurations allow T-tapping. T-tapping is only limited by sound installation techniques.
Addressable Contact Input Device
Figure 7-13. Style 6, RX/TX PC Line Connections Loop Isolator devices are available to support NFPA-72 Wiring Style 7 and are installed on the PC line of the RX/ TX module. Isolator packages are available for electrical box mount (Single Gang), 6-inch base mount and an RX/ TX mount. By "flanking" each group of loop devices with a pair of loop isolators, each zone is protected from opens and shorts. A zone is defined as a group of loop devices. In this style of installation, a short circuit between any two loop isolators will not affect any other zone. The isolators on each side of the short will open the PC line. Figure 7-15 and the RX/TX Module Installation Wiring Diagram in Appendix I depict a typical NFPA Style 7 installation.
SmartOne TM
Detector Bases
Note:
T-Tap
The maximum number of loop devices that can be connected between loop isolators is thirty (30). During a short circuit fault condition, the control panel will register a trouble condition for each device located between the two affected loop isolators.
TB1 of RX/TX Module
Figure 7-12. Style 4, RX/TX PC Line Connections
76-100016-001
7-7
July 2003
PEGAsys
located on the respective output module, insert the end of each wire into its proper terminal block slot, and tighten the slot screws firmly.
Loop Isolator Zone 2 Loop Isolator
Instructions for connecting output devices are provided on their respective installation wiring diagrams located in the Appendix I of this manual. Refer to the respective manufacturers literature for specific installation instructions of output devices. Note: All Non-Power Limited wiring must be routed away from Power Limited wiring by a minimum of inch, per NFPA and UL requirements. For Power Limited Circuits use Type FPL, FPLP or FPLR cable per NEC Article 760. EXTERNAL POWER FAILURE INDICATOR CONNECTION
Zone 1 Detector Base Loop Isolator
Zone 3
Loop Isolator
7-12
TB1 of RX/TX Module Note: Each zone can consist of 30 loop devices between loop isolators.
The PEGAsys System provides a 2 A @ 30 Vdc SPDT relay on the power supply monitor module that de-energizes (normally powered) in the event of a power supply trouble. Troubles include: AC Power Failure 24 Vdc Power Supply Failure Battery Failure Ground Fault Communications Failure
Figure 7-14. Style 6, RX/TX PC Line Connections with Loop Isolators

Loop Isolator Loop Isolator Loop Isolator
Loop Isolator
Zone 2
Zone 1
See Note
Zone 3
The power supply trouble relay is normally powered so that, in the event of power failure, the relay will transfer to the de-energized state. The contact can be used to signal an external power supply trouble indicator.
Loop Isolator
Loop Isolator
The wiring to an external power supply trouble indicating device is to be run through a conduit from the indicating device to the Central Control Panel. The conduit must be attached to any convenient CCP enclosure knockout. Connect wiring to TB1 on the CCPs power supply PCB, as shown in Figure 3-5. 7-13 DETECTOR INSTALLATION
Note: Adjacent loop isolators must be within 20 ft. of a device with wiring in conduit.
Figure 7-15. Style 7, RX/TX PC Line Connection 7-11 OUTPUT SIGNAL CONNECTION
The PEGAsys System provides output signals to drive alarm devices and communicate with central stations and control equipment. These outputs are provided on the CCM and optional output modules. All field wiring to output devices is to be run from the output device circuit to the field devices. The wiring must be brought through any convenient Central Control Panel enclosure knockout. Route the wiring to the terminal block
July 2003
1 2 3 4
24V RET 24V RET
RX/TX
Refer to the SmartOne Smoke and Heat Detector Installation Sheet (P/N 74-212) for installation instructions. Also, refer to Paragraph 2-8.6 for setting addresses and registering RCUs. 7-14 SETTING AND ADJUSTING SMOKE AND HEAT DETECTOR SENSITIVITIES
Set the sensitivity of SmartOne ionization and photoelectric smoke detectors and heat detectors by setting the threshold alarm and pre-alarm smoke density and temperature levels respectively. The SmartOne smoke detectors (Ionization and Photoelectric) were previously programmed for a device application during the registration process.
7-8 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
The smoke detectors have specific sensitivities for particular applications. There are three applications which represent the majority of detector use: Open Area, Open Area (High Air Flow) and Duct. The sensitivity adjustment is accomplished in one of two ways: 1. Smoke and Heat Detector Configuration. During the process of configuring, the operator uses the PCS program and selects the application of the detector and adjusts the settings of the alarm and pre-alarm values within the range for the application, or accepts the default values for the application. 2. Sensitivity Setting Operation. This procedure is selected from the user menus. This method is generally used for systems which have been installed and operational for a period of time. It should only be used if there is a need to change the sensitivity of the device. 7-14.1 Setting and Adjusting Smoke and Heat Detector Sensitivity Procedure The pre-alarm sensitivity ranges, by device type, are: Device Ionization Photoelectric Device Thermal Open Area 0.51.5%/FT 0.23.5 %/FT High Velocity 0.51.0 %/FT 0.22.0 %/FT
50 ft. Spacing 70 ft. Spacing 80155 F 80145 F
5. This prompt asks the user for the pre-alarm level for the detector(s) to be set. Key in the desired pre-alarm level and press the return key. After pressing return the display will read: SET DETECTOR SENSITIVITY ALARM _._ (0.5 -3.0/FT) The alarm sensitivity ranges, by device type, are: Device Ionization Photoelectric Device Thermal Open Area 0.51.5%/FT 0.53.5 %/FT High Velocity 0.51.0 %/FT 0.52.0 %/FT
The step-by-step procedure to perform the sensitivity adjustment is as follows: 1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows: a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD b. Type in the Level 2 password. c. Press the return () key. Verify that the display reads: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST
50 ft. Spacing 70 ft. Spacing 135155 F 135145 F
6. This prompt asks the user for the alarm level for the detector(s) to be set. Key in the desired alarm level and press the return key. After pressing return the display will read: LEVELS SET ON XX DETECTORS 7. This message verifies that the desired sensitivity adjustments were done on XX number of detectors. The sensitivity for all specified detectors (depending on which type was previously selected) will be as set in this procedure. 7-15 ADDRESSABLE CONTACT INPUT DEVICE INSTALLATION
2. Select the Detector Sensitivity by typing in 3-3-2. Verify that the display reads: 1:IONIZATION 3:THERMAL 2:PHOTOELECTRIC (<) to return
3. Select the desired detector style which is to have its sensitivity adjusted. After type selection, the system displays: SET DETECTOR SENSITIVITY DETECTORS FROM _ _ _ _ TO _ _ _ _ Note: The user would enter the address range of the detectors to be adjusted. The range can be from 1 to 255. The system will adjust the sensitivity of all the specified type of detectors which were previously chosen (Ion, Photo or Heat) within the range. SET DETECTOR SENSITIVITY PREALARM _._ (0.2 -3.0 / FT)
The Addressable Contact Input Devices are designed to be installed in a North American 2-in. (64 mm) deep onegang box, or a standard 4 in. square box 1-in. (38 mm) deep with a two-gang blank cover. The AI terminal block will accept #14, #16 and #18 AWG wire (1.5, 1.0 and 0.75 mm2 respectively) with size #18 being a minimum requirement. Refer to the wiring the diagram in Appendix I for specific connection information. Also refer to Paragraphs 2-8.6 and 2-8.7 for setting addresses and other parameters. The installation must comply with national and local electrical codes. 7-16 ADDRESSABLE RELAY OUTPUT DEVICE INSTALLATION
4. Press the return key and the display will read:
The Addressable Contact Output Devices are designed to be installed in a North American 2 in. (64 mm) deep onegang box, or a standard 4 in. square box 1 (38 mm) deep with a two-gang blank cover. The AO terminal block
76-100016-001 7-9 July 2003
PEGAsys
will accept #14, #16 and #18 AWG wire (1.5, 1.0 and 0.75 mm2 respectively) with size #18 being a minimum requirement. See Appendix I for specific connection information. Also refer to Paragraphs 2-8.6 and 2-8.7 for setting addresses and other parameters. The installation must comply with national and local electrical codes. Note: All Non Power Limited wiring must be routed away from Power Limited wiring by a minimum of inch, per NFPA and UL requirements. For Power Limited Circuits use Type FPL, FPLP or FPLR cable per NEC Article 760. INSTALLATION CHECKOUT the type required by the terminal device. Route the connection cable to the RS-232 modular plug labelled PC port jack until it snaps into place. The terminal or computer must be located in the same room as the Central Control Panel. The parameters for and connections to the RS-232 PC port are as follows: Parameters: Note: 9600 Baud 8 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit No Parity These parameters are fixed and not adjustable.
7-17
Before powering up the PEGAsys for the first time, ensure that the following has been completed: Central Control Module (CCM), RX/TX Module and System Power Supply are secured to the back of the enclosure. CCM is connected to the RX/TX Module, Display Assembly, System Power Supply (communications bus and 24 Vdc) and Remote RS-485 peripheral(s) if any. CCM configuration jumpers configured correctly to ensure proper operation of the programmable (signal/ release) output (MP1). Optional motherboard, if installed, is connected to the CCM (communications bus) and system power supply (24 Vdc). RX/TX Module is connected to the CCM (RJ-12) and system power supply (24 Vdc). Output modules, if used, are installed in the motherboard, addressed correctly, configured for appropriate mode of operation and their external wiring is connected correctly. Perform the Power-Up procedure in Chapter 4, Paragraph 4-6. Refer to Chapter 2 for system operations and programming. CONNECTION OF PERIPHERALS
Pin and Function: 7-18.2 1 2 3 4 5 6 TX Signal Ground RTS CTS N/C RX Connecting a Printer
The RS-232 printer port of the CCM is a supervised connection. The installer must enable the printer port for operation. The enabling or disabling of the printer port would be done by accessing the first or second level menu. A connection cable is all that is needed to connect a serial printer to the RS-232 printer port of the CCM. The following diagram represents the cable. CCM TX Sig. Gnd. RTS CTS* N/C RX PIN 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. PRINTER RX (receive data) Sig. Gnd. DTR*
7-18
The following paragraphs will describe how to connect a terminal or personal computer and a printer. 7-18.1 Connecting a Terminal or Personal Computer
* Note: +8 to +12 Vdc signal needed for supervision if using a graphic annunciator.
JK2
Pin 6 Pin 1
A UL Listed EDP terminal or computer can be connected to the system RS-232 port. A 6-wire RJ-12 type modular phone jack (PC port), located on the CCM, provides easy connection. The terminal or computer connection cable must have an RJ-12 type modular phone plug that connects to the CCM (use P/N 74-100016-003, for a DB9 connector for laptops, or P/N 74-100016-001 for a DB25 connector for personal computers). The connector at the terminal end must be of
July 2003 7-10
PRINT PORT
Figure 7-16. CCM Printer Port

76-100016-001
PEGAsys
APPENDIX A POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS

A-1 AC BRANCH CIRCUIT disconnect devices, from the power source to the fire alarm/ suppression control panel. When multiple power supplies are installed in the system enclosure(s) they must all be fed from the same circuit. Over-current protection for this circuit must comply with Article 760 of the National Electric Code, NFPA-72, as well as applicable local codes. Use a minimum of # 14 AWG with 600-V insulation for this branch circuit.
The PEGAsys fire alarm/suppression control system requires connection to a separate dedicated AC branch circuit (120 or 240 Vac), which must be labeled FIRE ALARM. This branch circuit must connect to the line side of the main power feed of the protected premises. No other equipment may be powered from the fire-alarm branch circuit. The branch circuit wire must run continuously, without any
Table A-1. AC Branch Circuit Requirements (120 Vac)

Number of Devices 1 X
Device Type
Current Draw (Amps)
Total Current per Device
Control Panel
1.9
1.9
Auxiliary Power Supply
1.9 Sum column for AC Branch Current required
Amps
Note:
Each additional main power supply and auxiliary power supply added to the system would increase the AC requirement by 1.9 Amps (max.)
Table A-2. AC Branch Circuit Requirements (220 Vac)

Number of Devices 1 X
Device Type
Current Draw (Amps)
Total Current per Device
Control Panel
0.95
0.95
Auxiliary Power Supply
Amps
Note:
Each additional main power supply and auxiliary power supply added to the system would increase the AC requirement by 0.95 Amps (max.)
76-100016-001
A-1
July 2003
PEGAsys
Note: A-2 SYSTEM STANDBY POWER REQUIREMENTS Use Table A-3 (standby or non-alarm) to determine main system power supply and any installed auxiliary power module standby current requirements.
The control panel provides regulated power for operating external devices, system operation, and standby battery charging. The power for operating external devices is expandable. When using additional main power supplies in expansion cabinets, each supply must be evaluated for its loading in the same way as the primary power supply in the main cabinet.
Table A-3. Standby Power Requirements (24 Vdc)

Mo d u le/D evice Central Control Module RXTX module Power supply Moni tor Auxi li ary Output 1, Max 1.5A (See Notes 1 and 2) Auxi li ary Output 2, Max 1.5A (See Notes 1 and 2) Multi -Loop Mother Board Si gnal Audi ble Output Module Relay Output Module Ci ty Ti e Output Module Agent Release Output Module F IE L D D E V IC E S Ioni zati on Detector Photoelectri c Detector Addressable Contact Input Addressable Contact Output Loop Isolators 0.000400 0.000405 0.000310 0.000330 0.001 X X X X X Sum Column for Standby Load (Notes 2) = = = = = = Amps 0.035 0.025 0.010 0.030 0.065 S tan d b y C u rren t (Am p s ) 0.070 0.035 0.060 X X X X X X X X X X Mo d u le/S ystem 1 = = = = = = = = = = Maximu m S tan d b y C u rren t (Amp s) 0.070
Note: 1. Auxiliary Outputs must be considered for total standby alarm loading of the system power supply. 2. Use of auxiliary 24 Vdc outputs of during standby operation must not cause the calculated standby current of the system to exceed its rated maximum as defined in the Table A-6.
July 2003
A-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
A-3 Note: SYSTEM ALARM POWER REQUIREMENTS Use Table A-4 (Alarm ) to determine alarm current requirements for main system power supply and auxiliary power supply combination (if used). When using additional main power supplies in expansion cabinets, each supply must be evaluated for its own loading in the same way as the primary power supply in the main cabinet.
Table A-4. Alarm Power Requirements (24 Vdc)

Module/Device Central Control Module CCM MP01 and MP02 Output (See Note 1) RXTX Module Power Supply Monitor Auxiliary Output 1, Max 1.5A (See Note 2) Auxiliary Output 2, Max 1.5A (See Note 2) Multi-Loop Mother Board Signal Audible Output Module Signal Module Outputs (See Note 3) Relay Output Module City Tie Output Module Agent Release Output Module Agent Release Module Signal Circuit (See Note 5) Agent Release Module Signal Circuits (Note 4) FIELD DEVICES Ionization Detector Photoelectric Detector Addressable Contact Input Addressable Zone Monitor Addressable Contact Output Loop Isolators (Active) PALM for use with ORION XT HSSD 0.000440 0.000445 0.000380 0.000400 0.000350 0.007 0.050 X X X X X X X Sum Column for Alarm Load = = = = = = = = Amps 0.075 0.080 0.150 .035 0.135 0.035 0.060 Alarm Current (Amps) 0.210 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X = = = = = = = = = = = = Module/System 1 = Maximum Alarm Current (Amps) 0.210
Note: 1. CCM Alarm condition power requirements must be evaluated for loading of the signaling devices. Each signal circuit can provide up to 2 Amps of 24 Vdc power for signaling device use. 2. Auxiliary Outputs would have to be considered for total alarm loading of the system power supply. 3. Each signal output module's alarm condition power requirements must be evaluated for loading of the signaling devices. Each signal circuit can provide up to 2 Amps of 24 Vdc power for signaling device use. There are a total of four (4) signal circuits per module. 4. Each agent release module contains three signaling circuits per module, which must be evaluated for loading. Each signal circuit will provide up to 2 Amps of 24 Vdc power for signaling device use. 5. With constant power solenoids, the current draw of the solenoid must be added in the calculation. Momentary solenoids are negligible in their current draws and should not be added into the calculation.
76-100016-001 A-3 July 2003
PEGAsys
A-4 CALCULATING BATTERY SIZE REQUIRED
Table A-5 sums the standby and alarm loads to arrive at the battery size, in amp hours (AH), needed to support the control panel. There is a maximum battery size which the system power supply (P/N 76-100009-010) is capable of charging. Select batteries which meet or exceed the total amp hours (AH) calculated and are within the acceptable range of the system battery charger output, which is 12 to 99 AH. Using the totals from Table A-3 and Table A-4, complete Table A-5 to determine the total battery (AH) capacity necessary for the power supply. Table A-5: Total Battery Capacity Required
Total Standby Load (From Table A-3) ( ) Total Alarm Load (From Table A-4) ( ) X Required Standby Time (4, 24, 60 or 90) hours ( ) Required Alarm Time (5 min. enter 0.084) (10 Min. enter 0.167) ( ) Total Amp Hours Required (Sum of above) (Derating Factor) X 0.1 Total AH Required (Original AH required + Derating Factor) =
= = =
Note: 1. Main system enclosure can house up to two (2) 33 AH batteries (P/N 89-100052-001). If an auxiliary power module is added to the system the batteries must be moved to a separate battery box or secondary enclosure, if used. 2. NFPA 722002 Protected Premises or Proprietary fire alarm systems require 24 hours of standby power followed by five minutes alarm activation. 3. NFPA 722002 Auxiliary or Remote Station requires 24 hours of standby power followed by five minutes alarm activation. 4. NFPA 722002 allows four hours of standby battery capacity if there is an automatic starting engine driven generator. 5. NFPA 2001 requires 24 hours of standby and five minutes of alarm activation. 6. Factory Mutual requires Pre-action and Deluge systems to have 90 hours of battery standby and 10 minutes of alarm activation.
July 2003
A-4
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
A-5 POWER SUPPLY/BATTERY CAPACITY
The system is capable of charging batteries of various capacities up to 99 AH; refer to Table A-6 for details concerning battery capacities and charging capabilities. Table A-6. Battery Capacities
B attery (B acku p H o u rs) 12 AH (4 hours) 17 AH (4 hours) 33 AH (4 hours) 33 AH (24 hours) 160 AH (24 hours) 66 AH (24 hours) 99 AH (60 hours) 99 AH (60 hours) 160 AH (90 hours) Maximu m Availab le S tan d b y C u rren t Am p s (F o r On e P o w er S u p p ly) 2.5 3.6 N/A 1.2 Not Allowed for 1 Power Supply 0.9 1.4 0.9 Not Allowed for 1 Power Supply 1.6 6.0 7.1 Maximu m Availab le S tan d b y C u rren t Am p s (F o r Tw o P o w er S u p p ly)
A-5.1
Power Requirement Example
The following power calculations will be based on a the system configuration listed below: Central Control Panel (CCP) with Field Devices: Central Control Module Ten (10) Ionization Detectors Two (2) RX/TX Modules Twenty (20) Photoelectric Detectors One (1) Power Supply Module Ten (10) Heat Detectors One (1) Multi-Loop Motherboard Six (6) Addressable Contact Input Devices
Two (2) Signal Output Modules, with signal appliances totaling .800A on each Four (4) Addressable Contact Output Devices One (1) Signaling Device, connected to MP1 of the CCM One (1) Output Relay Module One (1) Agent Release Output Module, has a momentary control head on the releasing circuit and signaling appliances totalling 0.5 A. AC Branch Current Calculation Example
A-5.2
This example is based on the system specified in the previous paragraph. This system current calculation is for a 120 Vac main feed. Refer to Paragraph A-1 for additional information.
Table A-7. AC Branch Current Calculation Example

Device Type Number of Devices 1 X Current Draw (Amps) 1.9 = Total Current per Device 1.9
Control Panel Auxiliary Power Supply
1.9 Amps
76-100016-001
A-5
July 2003
PEGAsys
A-5.3 Main Power Supply Loading Examples
This example is based on the same system as above. Refer to Paragraph A-2 for additional information.
Table A-8. Standby or Non-Alarm Power Requirement Calculation

Module/Device Central Control Module RX/TX module Power supply Monitor Auxiliary Output 1, Max 1.5A Auxiliary Output 2, Max 1.5A Multi-Loop Mother Board Signal Audible Output Module Relay Output Module City Tie Output Module Agent Release Output Module FIELD DEVICES Ionization Detector Photoelectric Detector Heat Detector Addressable Contact Input Addressable Contact Output Loop Isolators 0.000400 0.000400 0.000400 0.000310 0.000330 0.001 X X X Sum Column for Standby Load X X 10 20 10 6 4 = = = = 0.380 Amps = = 0.004 0.008 0.004 0.0024 0.0016 0.035 0.025 0.010 0.030 0.065 Standby Current (Amps) 0.070 0.035 0.060 X X X X X X X X X X 1 1 2 1 Module/System 1 2 1 = = = = = = = = = = 0.065 0.035 0.050 0.010 Maximum Standby Current (Amps) 0.070 0.070 0.060
July 2003
A-6
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Table A-9. Alarm Power Requirement Calculation
Mo d u le/D evice Central Control Module CCM MP01 and MP02 Output RX/TX Module Power Supply Moni tor Auxi li ary Output 1, Max 1.5A Auxi li ary Output 2, Max 1.5A Multi -Loop Mother Board Si gnal Audi ble Output Module Si gnal Module Outputs Relay Output Module Ci ty Ti e Output Module Agent Release Module Agent Release Output Ci rcui ts Agent Release Module Si gnal Ci rcui t F IE L D D E V IC E S Ioni zati on Detector Photoelectri c Detector Heat Detector Addressable Contact Input Addressable Contact Output Loop Isolators (Acti ve) 0.000440 0.000445 0.000440 0.000380 0.000400 0.007 Alarm C u rren t (Amp s) 0.210 0.100 0.035 0.060 0 0 0.035 0.135 0.800 0.075 0.080 0.150 0 Usi ng momentary devi ce .500 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Sum Column for Alarm Load 10 20 10 6 4 1 1 1 1 2 total 1 Mo d u le/S ystem 1 1 2 1 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = 2.292 Amp s 0.0044 0.0088 0.0044 0.0026 0.0018 0.150 0 0.500 0.035 0.270 0.800 0.075 Maximu m Alarm C u rren t (Amp s) 0.210 0.100 0.070 0.060
76-100016-001
A-7
July 2003
PEGAsys
A-5.4 Battery Size Requirement Calculation Example
This example is based on the same system as above. Refer to Paragraph A-4 for additional information. Table A-10. Battery Size Requirement Calculation
Total from Standby Power Requirement Calculation (0.380) Total from Alarm Power Requirement Calculation (2.292) Required Standby Time (4, 24, 60 or 90) hours (24) Required Alarm Time (5 min. enter 0.084) (10 Min. enter 0.167) (0.084) Total of both sums equals Amp Hours Required (Sum of Above) (Derating factor) X 0.1 Total AH Required (Original total AH required + Derating Factor)
9.12
0.1925
9.312
0.9312
10.24
Example Results: The results of the prior calculations are as follows: Current requirement of the 120 Vac Main Feed is 1.9 Amps. System Power Requirement when in Standby is 0.380 Amps. System Power Requirements when in Alarm is 2.292 Amps. Battery Size Requirement is 10.241 AH. Select 12 AH batteries.
July 2003
A-8
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
APPENDIX B SYSTEM EXPANSION

B-1 INTRODUCTION The PEGAsys ML (multi-loop) system (P/N 76-100000-600) looks much the same as the system in Figure B-2 with the exception of the multi-loop motherboard (P/N 76-100017001) in the place of the basic motherboard (P/N 76-100007001). The multi-loop motherboard has the ability to connect up to eight (8) RX/TX loop controllers, for a maximum of 2040 intelligent addressable points per system.
AC OUT 1 2
L N
R
MOTHER BD CCM
RET 24V
RET 24V RET
RET
RET
Figure B-1 shows the single-loop PEGAsys system (P/N 76-100000-501). This includes the Central Control Module (CCM), Receiver/Transmitter (RX/TX) module, Power Supply/Charger assembly and the system enclosure. The basic system can be expanded as shown in the following paragraphs.
AC OUT 1 2
L N
06-129562-001
AUX 1 AUX 2
SHR
RET
AC IN
DC IN 1
24V
TB9
DS1
SHR 24V RET RET
TBL RELAY
C NC
W1
TB8
NO
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
SILENCE SCROLL
TP4
S1 W4 S2 A B
2 1 2 1
R
MOTHER BD CCM
RET 24V
RET 24V RET
RET
RET
06-129562-001
AUX 1 AUX 2
24V
24V
SYSTEM POWER
Kidde
TP3
S3
+ -
24V
BAT
F1
DC IN 2
Figure B-2. Single Loop with Motherboard Figure B-3 shows the PEGAsys system with an auxiliary power module (P/N 76-100009-002) installed. The auxiliary power supply module provides an additional 4 Amps of 24 Vdc power for a total of 8 Amps for system use. The unit would be installed if the system required more than the base system's 4 Amps of 24 Vdc power. When the auxiliary module is installed, the system batteries are moved to a battery cabinet (P/N 76-100010-001). The cabinet is a UL Listed battery enclosure for use with the PEGAsys. Figure B-1. Single Loop Figure B-2 shows the single-loop PEGAsys system with the optional output motherboard (P/N 76-100007-001) installed. The output motherboard provides the system with mechanical and electrical interfaces for up to eight (8) output modules of any style. To install the output modules, insert them into the desired motherboard slot and fasten to the metal bracket with the two (2) provided screws. Figure B-3 could also be a multi-loop system with the inclusion of the multi-loop motherboard and additional RX/TX loop controllers.
76-100016-001
B-1
24V
24V
SYSTEM POWER
The PEGAsys system is capable of substantial expansion in the number of RX/TX loops, output modules and system output power. The system will support up to sixteen (16) output modules for a single-loop system and twentythree (23) output modules for a multi-loop system, with a maximum of eight (8) of any one type of module. The system power supply monitor module can supervise two (2) power supply units (4 Amps each for a total of eight [8] Amps per module), which allows for up to 64 Amps of 24 Vdc power. The following diagrams will demonstrate the available ways of expanding the system.
SHR
RET
AC IN
DC IN 1
24V
TB9
DS1
SHR 24V RET RET
TBL RELAY
C NC
W1
TB8
NO
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
SILENCE SCROLL
TP4
S1 W4 S2 A B
24V
2 1 2 1
Kidde
TP3
S3
+ -
BAT
F1
DC IN 2
July 2003
PEGAsys
and motherboard) in the expansion enclosure can have its terminating jumper installed. The other two must be configured for inline RS-485 bus supervision. Auxiliary power supplies within the expansion enclosure can share a set of batteries, or they can individually support their own set of batteries.
N L N L G N L
SHR
RET
24V
AC OUT 1 2
AC IN
DC IN 1
TB9
DS1
SHR 24V RET RET
TBL RELAY
C NC
W1
TB8
NO
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
SILENCE SCROLL
TP4
S1 W4 S2 A B 2 1 2 1
24V
R
MOTHER BD CCM
RET 24V
RET 24V RET
RET
RET
06-129562-001
AUX 1 AUX 2
24V
24V
SYSTEM POWER
Kidde
TP3
S3
+ -
BAT
F1
DC IN 2
SHR
RET
24V
AC OUT 1 2
AC IN
DC IN 1
MOTHER BD CCM
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
TBL RELAY
06-129562-001
NO
NC
TB9
DS1
SHR 24V RET RET
DC IN 2
W4
TBL RELAY
TB8
NO C NC
DS1
AC OUT 1 2
S1
S2 2 1
L N
2 1
AC IN
N L
W1
F1
24V
S3
ASHLAND, MA 01721
RET
DC IN 1
W2 W3
SHR RET 24V RET
AUX 1 AUX 2
TP4
24V
SILENCE SCROLL
TP3
S3 S1 W4 S2 A B 2 1 2 1
+ -
BAT
W1
TB8
TB9
TP3
TP4 F1
RET
RET
24V
SHR
+ -
RET
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
24V
BAT
DC IN 2
R
MOTHER BD CCM
SYSTEM POWER
Kidde
24V RET 24V
MOTHER BD CCM
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
TBL RELAY
06-129562-001
NO
NC
RET 24V RET
W4 DS1 S1 S2 2 1 2 1
AC OUT 1 2 AC IN
L N N
L G
RET
RET
24V
24V
06-129562-001
AUX 1 AUX 2
S3
24V
RET
SHR RET 24V RET
DC IN 1
AUX 1 AUX 2
24V
W1
TB8
TB9
TP3
TP4 F1
RET
RET
24V
SHR
RET
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
24V
+ BAT
DC IN 2
Figure B-3. System with Auxiliary Power Supply Module Figure B-4 shows an expanded single-loop PEGAsys system which contains two (2) motherboard assemblies, three (3) complete power supply assemblies (24 Amps of 24 Vdc power) and up to sixteen (16) total possible output modules. The communications bus interconnections between the two motherboards are made by using six (6) conductors from the bus terminal block on the motherboard in the main enclosure to connect to the same terminal block on the motherboard in the expansion enclosure. This connection allows complete supervision by the CCM in the main enclosure of all output modules installed on the second motherboard. The 24 Vdc power for the motherboard (in the expansion enclosure) is derived from one of the power supply assemblies installed within that enclosure and is connected by a two-wire connection. The power supplies need to be tied to the communications bus for supervision purposes. In the above example, the installer would use a two-conductor cable to connect the communications bus from the motherboard assembly to the power supply. The second power supply could then be daisy-chained to the first to complete the communications connections. The main power supply and motherboard in the first enclosure must be configured for in-line RS-485 bus supervision by removing jumpers W4 and JP1, respectively. Only one of the three bus communication components (i.e., power supply monitor modules
July 2003 B-2
Figure B-4. Expanded Single Loop System Figure B-5 shows an expanded PEGAsys system which is capable of having eight (8) output modules of various types and a maximum of 24 Vdc power at 40 Amps. This DC power is hardwired into signal and release modules whose loading would otherwise cause more than 8 Amps of 24 Vdc current to be drawn from the motherboard during activation. The hardwire option allows the system installer to provide individual modules with their own power source. Refer to the particular module installation diagram in Chapter 7 and Appendix A for power-supply expansion guidelines. Note: One main power supply/charger assembly can be used to charge a common set of batteries. All other power supply/charger assemblies can be connected to the common set of batteries in parallel for backup DC power only. The charging circuit on the additional power supply/charger assemblies will have to be disabled by removing jumper W1. Be careful not to exceed the maximum charging capacity of the main power supply.
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
N L N L G N L
SHR
RET
24V
AC OUT 1 2
AC IN
DC IN 1
MOTHER BD CCM
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
TBL RELAY
TB9
DS1
SHR 24V RET RET
TB8
NO C NC
24V
RET
SHR RET 24V RET
24V
SILENCE SCROLL
BAT
TP3
S3 S1 W4 S2 A B 2 1 2 1
+ -
W1
TB8
TB9
TP3
TP4 F1
SYSTEM POWER
BAT
DC IN 2
R
MOTHER BD CCM
RET 24V
SYSTEM POWER
Kidde
24V
MOTHER BD CCM
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
TBL RELAY
RET 24V RET
06-129562-001
AUX 1 AUX 2
S3
24V
RET
SHR RET 24V RET
24V
W1
TB8
TB9
TP3
TP4 F1
SYSTEM POWER
BAT
DC IN 2
MOTHER BD CCM
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
TBL RELAY
24V
RET
SHR RET 24V RET
24V
W1
TB8
TB9
TP3
TP4 F1
SYSTEM POWER
BAT
DC IN 2
MOTHER BD CCM
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
TBL RELAY
24V
RET
SHR RET 24V RET
24V
W1
TB8
TB9
TP3
TP4 F1
SYSTEM POWER
BAT
DC IN 2
Figure B-6 shows an expanded PEGAsys system which could have sixteen (16) output modules and 56 Amps of 24 Vdc power. Figure B-6 also displays the flexibility to bring all four power supply assemblies in the second expansion enclosure to one set of batteries. In this arrangement, one of the four power supplies charges the batteries, and all four receive standby power from the batteries. Each power supply must have two of its own conductors connected directly to the battery set to meet code requirements. The three non-charging power supplies must have Jumper W1 removed to disable their charging circuits. Refer to Chapter 7 and Appendix A for more details on power expansion. Figure B-7 shows an expanded PEGAsys ML system which could have up to eight (8) RX/TX loop controllers and nine (9) output modules installed in the two motherboards. The system also has a maximum 24 Vdc power of 24 Amps, as shown in the diagram. Refer to Chapter 7 and Appendix A for power supply expansion guidelines.
06-129562-001
NO
NC
TBL RELAY
DC IN 2
W4 DS1 S1 S2 2 1 2 1
AC OUT 1 2 AC IN
L N L G N
W1
F1
S3
DC IN 1
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
AUX 1 AUX 2
TP4
R
RET 24V RET 24V
R
+ -
06-129562-001
NO
NC
A W4 S1 S2 2 1 2 1
DS1
AC OUT 1 2
L N L
RET
RET
24V
24V
AC IN DC IN 1
N L
Figure B-5. Expanded System for up to 8 Output Modules and 5 Primary/Auxiliary Power Supplies
N L N L G N L
AUX 1 AUX 2 06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2 06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2
R
RET RET RET 24V 24V 24V RET 24V 24V 24V
R
+ -
NO
NC
A W4 S1 S2 2 1 2 1 S3
DS1
L N L G N L
R
RET
R
+ -
NO
NC
A W4 S1 S2 2 1 2 1 S3
DS1
L N L G N L
R
RET
R
+ -
SHR
RET
24V
AC OUT 1 2
AC IN
DC IN 1
MOTHER BD CCM
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
TBL RELAY
06-129562-001
MOTHER BD CCM

A B
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
TBL RELAY
NO NC C
06-129562-001
NO
NC
TB9
DS1
SHR 24V RET RET
DC IN 2
W4
TBL RELAY
TB8
NO C NC
W4
DS1
AC OUT 1 2
S1
S2 2 1
DS1
L N
AC OUT 1 2
S1
S2
L N
2 1
AC IN
2 1
2 1
N L
AC IN
W1
F1
24V
S3
ASHLAND, MA 01721
RET
DC IN 1
24V
S3
DC IN 1
W2 W3
SHR RET 24V RET
RET
AUX 1 AUX 2
SHR RET 24V RET
AUX 1 AUX 2
TP4
24V
SILENCE SCROLL
TP3
S3 S1 W4 S2 A B 2 1 2 1
+ -
BAT
W1
TB8
TB9
24V
W1
TP3 TP4 F1
RET RET 24V SHR RET 24V RET 24V RET 24V
TB8
TB9
+ BAT
SYSTEM POWER
DC IN 2
TP3
TP4 F1
RET
RET
24V
SHR
RET
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
24V
+ BAT
DC IN 2
R
MOTHER BD CCM
SYSTEM POWER
Kidde
24V RET 24V
MOTHER BD CCM
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
TBL RELAY
06-129562-001
MOTHER BD CCM

A B
ASHLAND, MA 01721
NO
NC
W2 W3
TBL RELAY
NO NC C
06-129562-001
RET 24V RET
W4 DS1 S2 2 1 S1 2 1
AC OUT 1 2 AC IN
W4
L N N
DS1
AC OUT 1 2
S1
S2
L G
2 1
2 1
RET
RET
24V
24V
AC IN
06-129562-001
AUX 1 AUX 2
S3
24V
RET
SHR RET 24V RET
DC IN 1
24V
S3
RET
DC IN 1
Figure B-6. Expanded System for up to 16 Output Modules and 7 Primary/Auxiliary Power Supplies
76-100016-001 B-3 July 2003
AUX 1 AUX 2
SHR RET 24V RET
AUX 1 AUX 2
24V
W1
TB8
TB9
24V
W1
TP3 TP4 F1
RET RET 24V SHR RET 24V RET 24V RET 24V
TB8
TB9
+ BAT
SYSTEM POWER
DC IN 2
TP3
TP4 F1
RET
RET
24V
SHR
MOTHER BD CCM
RET
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET

A B
24V
+ BAT
DC IN 2
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
TBL RELAY
NO NC C
06-129562-001
RET 24V RET
W4 DS1 S1 S2 2 1 2 1 S3
24V
RET
SHR
L N N L
L G
AUX 1 AUX 2 06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2
24V
W1
TB8
TB9
TP3
TP4 F1
RET
RET
24V
SHR
MOTHER BD CCM
RET
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
24V

A W4 S1 S2 2 1 2 1 S3 B
+ BAT
DC IN 2
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
TBL RELAY
NO NC C
DS1
24V
RET
SHR RET 24V RET
L N N L
L G
24V
W1
TB8
TB9
TP3
TP4 F1
RET
RET
24V
SHR
RET
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
24V
+ BAT
DC IN 2
PEGAsys
AC OUT 1 2
L N
SHR
RET
AC IN
DC IN 1
24V
MOTHER BD CCM
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
TBL RELAY
06-129562-001
NO
NC
TB9
DS1
SHR 24V RET RET
DC IN 2
W4
TBL RELAY
TB8
NO C NC
DS1
AC OUT 1 2
S2 2 1
S1 2 1
L N N L
L G
AC IN
W1
F1
24V
S3
ASHLAND, MA 01721
RET
DC IN 1
W2 W3
SHR RET 24V RET
AUX 1 AUX 2
TP4
24V
PRE-ALARM
SILENCE
SYSTEM RESET
TP3
ALARM
SUPERVISORY
BAT
AC POWER
SYSTEM TROUBLE
SYSTEM ACKNOWLEDGE
SILENCE SCROLL
S3 S1 W4 S2 A B 2 1 2 1
+ -
W1
TB8
TB9
TP3
TP4 F1
RET
RET
24V
SHR
RET
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
24V
+ BAT
DC IN 2
R
MOTHER BD CCM
SYSTEM POWER
Kidde
24V RET 24V
MOTHER BD CCM
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
TBL RELAY
06-129562-001
NO
NC
RET 24V RET
W4 DS1 S2 2 1 S1 2 1
AC OUT 1 2 AC IN
L N N
L G
RET
RET
24V
24V
06-129562-001
AUX 1 AUX 2
S3
24V
RET
SHR RET 24V RET
DC IN 1
Figure B-7. Expanded ML System for 8 RX/TX and 9 Output Modules
AUX 1 AUX 2
24V
W1
TB8
TB9
TP3
TP4 F1
RET
RET
24V
SHR
RET
SYSTEM POWER
24V
RET
24V
RET
24V
+ BAT
DC IN 2
July 2003
B-4
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
APPENDIX C RELEASING APPLICATIONS

C-1 INTRODUCTION which is optionally programmable to be a signal release output. The PCS program is used to program the system for all functions, including releasing. For complete details, refer to the PCS manual. The following features are supported for releasing functions. C-3 ABORT
The PEGAsys system can be used for agent release, preaction sprinkler and deluge sprinkler control applications. When used with UL Listed, compatible actuating and initiating devices, the PEGAsys system meets the requirements of the following standards: NFPA 12 NFPA 12A NFPA 13 NFPA 15 NFPA 16 NFPA 17 NFPA 17A NFPA 2001 C-2 CO2 Extinguishing Systems (High Pressure) HALON 1301 Extinguishing Systems Sprinkler Systems Water Spray Systems Foam-Water Deluge and Foam-Water Spray Systems Dry-Chemical Extinguishing Systems Wet-Chemical Extinguishing Systems Clean-Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems PROGRAMMING
The abort function is a feature which manually stops a discharge time delay. The PEGAsys supports four styles of aborts, as listed in Table C-1. C-4 DELAY
The time-delay period is an installer programmable value which begins to count down after the automatic release criterion has be attained for a particular protected area. The time-delay can be programmed for activation after one or two alarm occurrences. C-5 SOAK
The PEGAsys system can support up to nine (9) independently controlled releasing outputs (AR1-AR8 and MP1), which are used to control releasing functions. AR1-AR8 are the agent release I/O modules which are inserted into the I/O motherboard. MP1 is the CCM releasing output
The soak function is used to automatically shut off the releasing solenoid at a pre-determined time after the mapped inputs activate it. It may be programmed as a 10-minute or 15-minute soak period. This soak function is for use in NFPA 16 applications only.
Table C-1. Abort Styles

Abort Type Underwriter Laboratories (UL)(Complies with UL 864) Industrial Risk Insurers (IRI) (Non-UL) New York City (Non-UL) Local Jurisdiction (Non-UL) Description Delay timer continues to count down upon abort activation, and stops at 10 second mark until release of abort switch. Upon release of abort switch, timer resumes the countdown starting at 10 seconds. Functions in similar manner to the UL-type abort, with the only exception that the abort will only function if held prior to the receipt of the second alarm. Operation of the abort switch, once an alarm exists, changes the delay timer to the selected delay, plus an additional 90 seconds. The timer will not start as long as the abort switch is held. Release of the abort switch continues the countdown from the initial value, plus the 90 seconds additional delay. Once the delay timer has started, operation of the abort switch restores the timer to its original value. The delay timer will not start as long as the abort switch is held. Release of the abort switch continues the countdown.
Note:
The abort function will not work if a time delay value is not entered in the EOC programming for the protected area. Maximum allowable delay is 60 seconds as allowed by UL 864. The abort input is not intended to be used for a service disconnect.
C-1 July 2003
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
(+) PC Line (-) In
(+) (-) PC Line Out
PUSH / HOLD
Remote LED (Optional)
10K ohms P/N 06-129025-003
SmartOne TM
.
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM ABORT
Addressable Contact Monitor P/N 70-407008-001
Figure C-1. Addressable Contact Monitor Interconnection with Abort Switch Note: The 10-K ohm resistor must be connected across the abort station contacts for supervision. Failure to install this resistor will result in a "Trouble Open" message for that monitor.
C-6
SPECIAL MODULE TYPES
The PEGAsys provides specific styles of devices which have special releasing functions. These devices are: C-6.1 Abort Switch
The abort switch is connected to an addressable contact monitor (P/N 70-407008-001) which is programmed as an abort input with a selected abort style, as explained in Table C-1. The addressable contact monitor is connected to a Listed abort station, such as the Kidde Suppression Sys-
(+) PC Line (-) In
SmartOne TM
Addressable Contact Monitor P/N 70-407008-001

Note:
Figure C-2. Addressable Contact Monitor Interconnection with Manual Release Switch The 10-K ohm resistor must be connected across the manual pull station contacts for supervision. Failure to install this resistor will result in a "Trouble Open" message for that contact monitor.
C-2 76-100016-001
July 2003
P/N 87875201
tem Abort switch (P/N 87875201). Figure C-1 shows the interconnection of the addressable contact monitor and the abort station switch. C-6.2 Manual Release Switch
The manual release switch is an addressable contact monitor (P/N 70-407008-001) which is programmed as a manual release input. The addressable contact monitor is connected to a Listed manual release station such as the Kidde Suppression Agent Release switch (P/N 84-100007-00X). Figure C-2 shows the interconnection of the addressable contact monitor and the manual release switch.
(+) (-) PC Line Out
FIRE ALARM
FIRE ALARM
10K ohms P/N 06-129025-003
PUSH PULL
P/N 84-100007-00X
PEGAsys
C-7 C-7.1 AGENT RELEASE APPLICATIONS CCM Release Output Wiring C-8 PRE-ACTION SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS
The PEGAsys system provides one output on the CCM (MP01, Terminal TB4, sounder 1 "A" leg), that is defaulted as a release output. See Appendix I and the PCS User's Manual for details on the configuration of this output. An example of the CCM releasing circuit wiring is shown in Figure C-3. For wiring details, see the CCM wiring diagram in Appendix I.
The PEGAsys system can be used to activate and supervise pre-action sprinkler and deluge sprinkler systems for protection of facilities. The CCM output (MP1) and agent release output modules (AR1-AR8) can be programmed for use with most popular sprinkler solenoids. For sprinkler applications the addressable input module (P/N 70-407008-00x) can be used to monitor and supervise any of the following sprinkler type inputs, as required, for each particular application. Inputs could be air pressure, waterflow, water level (tank), pump running, etc. Refer to Chapter 2 for details on programming the addressable input device for various reporting styles.
SOUNDER 1
REP 1
Figure C-3. CCM Release Output, Wiring Basics C-7.2 Release Module Output Wiring
The agent release module that the PEGAsys system uses to provide the release function offers one release output capable of powering two solenoids simultaneously. Refer to Appendix I and the PCS User's Manual for details on configuration of the release outputs, along with all other system parameters. All wiring from the agent release module to the release device is fully supervised, including the actual device in the circuit. An example of the releasing circuit wiring is provided in Figure C-4. For all wiring detail, see Appendix I. For a list of Approved devices, refer to Table 3-2 in this manual.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Single Solenoid
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Two Solenoid
Figure C-4. Release Module, Wiring Basics
76-100016-001
C-3
July 2003
PEGAsys
July 2003
C-4
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
APPENDIX D
Space Reserved for Future Use.
76-100016-001
D-1
July 2003
PEGAsys
July 2003
D-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
APPENDIX E FACTORY MUTUAL SPRINKLER REQUIREMENTS FOR PRE-ACTION AND DELUGE TYPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
E-1 GENERAL INFORMATION
PEGAsys system installation applications that require Factory Mutual (FM) Approval of pre-action and deluge sprinkler systems must conform to the following guidelines: SmartOne Thermal Detectors, Model THD-7252, when used, must be installed at 20 ft. spacings. The pre-alarm and alarm setpoint ranges are as follows: Pre-Alarm80 to 155 F Alarm135 to 155 F Initiating Circuits (RX/TX-PC line) must be configured for Style 6 wiring. See Appendix I for complete RX/TX PC line wiring instructions. Provide 90 hours of standby battery and 10 minutes of alarm operation. Refer to Appendix A. Agent release output can be CCM output MP1 or agent release module AR1-AR8. Each output is required to be configured for solenoid activation. The solenoid output on-time period should be set to either 90 seconds or on until reset using the PCS program.
76-100016-001
E-1
July 2003
PEGAsys
July 2003
E-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
APPENDIX F GLOSSARY
Address Addressable Device Addressable Contact Device (ACID) AdministrativeTask AlarmVerification Analog Analog Input Device Central Control Panel Central Control Module (CCM) Digital Device Distributed Intelligence A four digit code indicating the sequence or device number of a smart device. 1st digit is the RX/TX loop number and the remaining three digits are the device number. A device with the capability to automatically communicate its location and state via a multiplex trunk to a Central Control Panel. Monitor module that interfaces with an unpowered, contact-type initiating device. Two device types are available: Normally Open and Normally Closed. Reports, lists, status and other housekeeping functions of the Central Control Panel. A pre programmed time delay which causes the system to wait for a confirmation signal during the delay period before activating the pre programmed alarm outputs. Meets the NFPA 722002 definition. Pertaining to representation by means of a continuous variable and physical quantity. For example, to describe a physical quantity such as voltage, %/ft., etc. See Smart Device. An enclosure that houses Central Control Module(CCM), Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX), Power Supply, optional Motherboard and Output Modules. This module is the heart of the system. It contains the main Central Processing Unit, Display Assembly, Programmable Memory, Real-Time Clock, Watch Dog Timer, two RS-232C serial ports, two programmable signal outputs and three Form C relays. A device with two discrete states, such as a Contact Input or Relay Output RCUs. Computing power is distributed to the actual real world device. This reduces the communication burden on the loop, thus providing greater immunity to EMI and RFI. All Alarm and Prealarm decisions are made at the device level. The CPU in photoelectric or ionization detectors measures and stores its detection smoke chamber value 256 times per day. The CPU averages each days values and stores the daily average for 30 days. The daily average is stored in a scrolling fashion adding the final days average and dropping the average that is 30 days old. The values that are stored reflect the unique environmental condition that the detector experiences in daily operation. The sum of the scrolling 30 days is used to establish a reference point for smoke detection under the unique environmental conditions that the detector experiences. This feature reduces false alarms from environmental influences without reducing sensitivity. The display assembly includes: an indicating 80 character alphanumeric display, push button switches to control the system, and indicating LEDs to display system status. The PEGAsys display assembly is mounted on the CCM and it communicates with the Central Control Module. The EOC programming allows combining of inputs to obtain the desired outputs. The EOC language is flexible to suit most any fire alarm/suppression application. Symbols that are used to name or identify a combination of inputs (for example, 1001 + 1004= I001). An optional assembly, located in the Central Control Panel, that has the capacity for eight output modules. Typical output modules are Relay, Signal Audible and Agent Release. A daisy-chained SLC. A device which provides protection against wire to wire short conditions on the RX/TX PC line. Conforms to NFPA Style 7.0. Line or circuit interconnecting several devices from a central point. The use of one trunk or pair of wires to communicate with one or more devices. The PEGAsys allows 255 devices to communicate on one trunk. An assembly of conventional circuits, located in the Central Control Panel enclosure, to activate notification appliances, releasing solenoids or other devices specified in the system's operational requirements. Typical modules are Relay and Signal Audible.
Drift Compensation
Display Assembly Event Output Control (EOC) Internal Identifier (I001I255) Motherboard Loop Loop Isolators Multi drop Line Multiplex (Per NFPA-72) Output Module
76-100016-001
F-1
July 2003
PEGAsys
Ow ner Locations PC Line Memory locations that are programmable by the owner to store a 39-character alphanumeric description of the location of the initiating and control devices and output modules and circuits. Power and communication wires originating from the RX/TX Module. Also called Signal Line Circuit (SLC). An Output Module located in the Central Control Panel enclosure that interfaces with auxiliary equipment. Each module contains four individual programmable SPDT 2 Amp 24 Vdc relays. A total of eight (8) Relay Output Modules may be used in the system for a total of thirty-two (32) circuits. An addressable or smart field device that provides a relay contact to control a device such as a fan. Typically mounts in a 4-inch square electrical box. An addressable or smart field device. The Receiver/Transmitter module is located in the Central Control Panel enclosure and functions as a data transmission interface between the Central Control Module and remote control units (RCUs). An output module, located in the Central Control Panel enclosure, that provides two Class A, Style Z or four Class B, Style Y , 24 V, 2 Amp polarized signal circuits. All circuits are supervised for an open or short condition. A maximum of eight (8) modules with thirty-two (32) circuits may be installed in the PEGAsys system. Smart smoke detectors (ionization or photoelectric) measure smoke level every nine seconds within their smoke sensing chamber. After initailly detecting smoke the detector enters an alert state where it measures smoke concentration every two seconds. If the detector detects smoke three out of four samples, it sends a pre-alarm or alarm signal to the Central Control Panel. A device with the features of an addressable device but additionally has the computing power to make alarm decisions based on stored calibration and environmental data, and condition of the detector. Also the device transmits and receives analog values. Examples would be photoelectric or ionization detectors. A device without the electronics necessary to tie directly to the multiplex trunk. It requires an addressable input or addressable output device to interface with the PEGAsys system (i.e., conventional smoke and heat detectors). A code on the display that identifies an RCUs status. There are eight (8) field programmable states a RCU may be programmed to: Alarm, Trouble, Abort, Manual Alarm, Manual Release, WaterFlow, Supervisory and Normal. Provides primary and secondary system power. Stand-by batteries, provide DC voltage to the Power Supply in the event of an AC power failure. The stand-by batteries are located in the Central Control Panel enclosure. See multi drop Line. Only allowable in Style 4 configuration. A non-programmable relay which operates during any system trouble condition. A message on LCD display that identifies the type of device reporting. The message identifies Smoke and Heat detectors and Input and Output RCU devices. See Internal Identifier (I001-I255). This timer senses an abnormality in the Central Control Module CPU. If the CPU is operating normally, it periodically resets the timer. If the timer is not reset, it times out and indicates a system trouble. Percent of smoke obscuration per foot.
Relay Output Module
Relay Output RCU Remote Control Unit (RCU)
RX/TX Module
Signal Audible Output Module
Smart Smoke Detector
Smart Device
Standard Fire Alarm Device
State
System Pow er Supply
T-TAP Trouble Relay Type Variable Identifier Module Watch Dog Timer % /ft.
July 2003
F-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
APPENDIX G DISPLAY ABBREVIATIONS

Abbreviation 232 A.V. ACK ADDR. ALM AOF BAT. C.L. CD CT DISCON DISP DR EW EX INP IT L9 LEV. LV NA NG NR O.L. Meaning RS-232-C Alarm Verification Acknowledge Address Alarm Alarm Off Battery Combinational Logic Contact Detector Error City Tie Disconnect Panel Display Drift Error EEPROM Write Error External Trouble Input Illegal RCU Type Line + 9V Trouble Level Line Voltage Trouble NOV RAM Access Error No good Not Registered Owner Location Abbreviation OF OK OP OR OUT PC P.S. P.W. POF PRE PRNT PROG R.P. RTC RY SG SH SPV TBL TE TOF TST UK VOLT. ZA Meaning Off All Right Open Optional Relay Output Power Communications Line Power Supply Password Pre-alarm Off Pre-alarm Printer Program Remote Panel Real Time Control Relay Output Module Signal Output Module Short Supervisory Trouble RCU Test No Good Trouble Off RCU Test Unknown Device Connected Voltage Zone Alarm
76-100016-001
G-1
July 2003
PEGAsys
July 2003
G-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
APPENDIX H WIRING REQUIREMENTS FOR PEGASYS SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT (RX/TX)

RECOMMENDED WIRE TYPES For best results, use twisted, unshielded, low-capacitance, addressable-fire-alarm wire with a nominal wire-to-wire capacitance of approximately 20 pf (i.e., picofarads, where 1 pf = 10-6 f) per foot for the RX/TXs signaling-line circuit. Typical wire types that meet these criteria are indicated below:
Wire Siz e (AWG) 18 Manufacturer Atlas Wire & Cable Corp. West Penn Wire West Penn Wire Coleman Cable Coleman Cable Clifford of Vermont, Inc. Comtran Corporation Belden Wire & Cable Co. Belden Wire & Cable Co. Belden Wire & Cable Co. BSC C Genesis Cable Systems Genesis Cable Systems Genesis Cable Systems 16 Atlas Wire & Cable Corp. West Penn Wire Coleman Cable Coleman Cable Clifford of Vermont, Inc. Comtran Corporation Belden Wire & Cable Co. Belden Wire & Cable Co. Belden Wire & Cable Co. BSC C Genesis Cable Systems Genesis Cable Systems Genesis Cable Systems Part Number 228-18-1-1TP D 980 60980B 98181 98820 1P18 B1 FPL-M 4184 5320UJ 9571 6320UJ 341802E 4050 4431 4631 228-16-1-1TP D 990 98161 98620 1P16 B1 FPL-M 4234 5220UJ 9572 6220UJ 341602E 4051 4432 4632 Rating FP L FP L F P LP FP L F P LR FP L F P LR FP L F P LR F P LP F P LP FP L F P LR F P LP FP L FP L FP L F P LR FP L F P LR FP L F P LR F P LP F P LP FP L F P LR F P LP Cap (pf/ft.) 12.5 16.0 29.0 19.0 26.0 15.0 20.0 12.5 22.0 25.0 25.0 15.0 15.0 16.0 12.5 18.0 20.0 27.0 19.0 20.0 13.5 29.0 27.0 18.0 17.0 17.0 18.0
76-100016-001
H-1
July 2003
PEGAsys
Wire Siz e (AWG) 14 Manufacturer Atlas Wire & Cable Corp. Coleman Cable Coleman Cable Comtran Corporation Belden Wire & Cable Co. Belden Wire & Cable Co. BSC C Genesis Cable Systems Genesis Cable Systems Genesis Cable Systems 12 Coleman Cable Coleman Cable Genesis Cable Systems Genesis Cable Systems Part Number 228-14-1-1TP 98141 98420 4240 9580 6120UJ 341402E 4052 4433 4633 98121 98200 4054 4434 Rating FP L FP L F P LR F P LR F P LR F P LP F P LP FP L F P LR F P LP FP L F P LR FP L F P LR Cap (pf/ft.) 14.5 20.0 25.0 21.0 27.0 25.9 20.0 19.0 19.0 20.0 27.0 29.0 21.0 22.0
EXAMPLE NO. 1 Determine the recommended wire size for a daisy-chained, Class-B, Style-4 SLC with 160 RCUs and a total wire length of 7,500 feet. The total wire length is the sum of wiring for the positive and negative SLC legs, and is not the linear distance from the control unit to the most-remote RCU. Try #14 AWG wire. The total SLC wiring resistance is: 7,500 ft. X 2.525 /1,000 ft. = 18.9 . If we select Coleman Cable wire, P/N 98141 (from Recommended Wire Listing), the total SLC wiring capacitance is: 3,750 ft. x 20 x 10-12 farads/ft. = .075 x 10-6 farads (or, 0.075 f). Coleman Cable wire, P/N 98141, is acceptable. Note: Capacitance values correspond to a pair of wires as compared to resistance values that correspond to a single conductor. The wire-pair length for this SLC is 3,750 feet, and this value is used for the SLCs capacitance calculation.
EXAMPLE NO. 2 Determine the proper wire size for a Class-A, Style-6 SLC with 100 RCUs and a total wire length 6,000 feet. The total wire length is the sum of wiring for the positive and negative SLC legs for both the primary and redundant communications circuits, and is not the linear distance from the control unit to the most-remote RCU. Try #18 AWG wire first. The total SLC wiring resistance is using #18 AWG is: 6,000 ft. X 6.385 /1,000 ft. = 38.3 . The total SLC wiring resistance (38.3 ) when using #18 AWG wire exceeds the maximum SLC wiring resistance of 26 . Use larger wire. Try #16 AWG next. The total SLC wiring resistance using #16 AWG is: 6,000 ft. X 4.016 /1,000 ft. = 24.1 .
July 2003
H-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
The total SLC wiring resistance (24.1 ) when using #16 AWG wire is less than the maximum SLC wiring resistance of 26 . The SLC wiring resistance using #16 AWG wire is acceptable. If we select Coleman Cable wire, P/N 98161 (from Recommended Wire Listing), the total SLC wiring capacitance is: 3,000 ft. x 20 x 10-12 farads/ft. = .06 x 10-6 farads (or, 0.06 f). Coleman Cable wire, P/N 98161, is acceptable.
76-100016-001
H-3
July 2003
PEGAsys
July 2003
H-4
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
APPENDIX I SYSTEM DRAWINGS

This appendix provides installation diagrams and instructions for various PEGAsys system modules.
Component Central Control Module Receiver/Transmitter Module Power Supply Module (Revision XC) Power Supply Module (Revision AC) Agent Release Module Signal Audible Module Relay Output Module City Tie Module Basic I/O Motherboard Multi-Loop Motherboard Addressable Input Device Addressable Output Device Addressable Input Device Addressable Output Device
Page No. I-2 I-6 I-8 I-9 I-11 I-14 I-17 I-18 I-20 I-22 I-24 I-25 I-26 I-27
76-100016-001
I-1
July 2003
REP 1
REP 2
PEGAsys
BT1
RS-485 PORT
JK1
1
24V 5V 0V 5V 0V
TB6
RX/TX PORT
TO REMOTE PC FOR PROGRAMMING TO EXTERNAL PRINTER 24 VDC FROM POWER SUPPLY
PROCESSOR PORT
DISPLAY RESET SWITCH
DISPLAY TROUBLE LED

BUZZER
PLG2
SW1
PRINT PORT
DS1
PLG3
0V
EARTH FLT SUPPLY FLT
DISP PORT PC PORT
EARTH FAULT
JK1
JK2
JK3
PLG2
SUPPLY FAULT
24 VDC
24V
PRINT PORT
PLG1
DISPLAY
0V
TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram CCM/ Display and Control Assembly (PEGAsys)
PLG1
76-100016-001
DISPLAY PORT
PC PORT
TB6
July 2003
SOUNDER 1 B A + + C V/F RELAY FAULT NO NC C SOUNDER 2 A B + + VOLT FREE RELAYS 2 1 NO NC C NO NC
TB4 TB5 TB1
TB2
TB3
SKT1
DISPLAY ASSEMBLY
SEE NOTE 1 JP4 SEE NOTE 1 JP3
CCM RESET BUTTOM

JP1 SW1 SEE NOTE 1 IC1 JP2 JK5
TO OUTPUT MODULES AND POWER SUPPLIES

JK4
I-2
JK2 PLG2 JK3
TO RX/TX LOOP CONTROLLER
24 VDC FROM POWER SUPPLY
NOTES:
7. RELEASING OUTPUT DEVICES SPECIFICATION
1. JUMPER ARRANGEMENTS FOR SOUNDER 1 DEVICE Imax. "ON" TIME COMMENT AGENT RELEASE OFF ON OFF ON RESISTANCE (min.)
RELEASING
76-100016-001
890181 899175 895630 897494 486500 486500-01 81-100000-001 06-118329-001 06-118384-001 FM SOLENOID GROUP A B,D E,G 2.4 A 2.4 A 2.0 A 1.5 A 240 mA 240 mA 440 mA 225 mA 520 mA 458 mA 700 mA 420 mA 10 OHM 10.8 OHM 12 OHM 15.9 OHM 103 OHM 103 OHM 59 OHM 108 OHM 46 OHM 52 OHM 34 OHM 57 OHM MOMENTARY MOMENTARY MOMENTARY CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS -- FM APPROVED ONLY. NOT UL LISTED. UL LISTED ONLY. NOT FM APPROVED. 8. RELEASING OUTPUT DEVICES SOLENOIDS 890181 899175 895630 897494 486500 486500-01 81-100000-001 06-118329-001 06-118384-001 FM GROUPS SPRINKLER SOLENOIDS A,B,D,E,G WIRE LENGTH (FT.) 14 AWG 16 AWG 18 AWG -- COMMENT 12 AWG 300 300 300 380 3000 3000 2300 200 200 200 240 2000 2000 1460 800 800 570 800 340 2000 760 480 1200 120 120 120 150 1200 1200 915 3000 1440 1440 940 1570 760 500 760 480 300 525 340 220 370 9. FOR SPECIFIC SIGNAL DEVICE INFORMATION REFER TO FENWAL DATA SHEETS 75.XXX FM APPROVED ONLY. NOT UL LISTED. UL LISTED ONLY. NOT FM APPROVED. 10. S - FOR SUPERVISED CIRCUITS. L - FOR POWER LIMITED CIRCUITS. POSITION OF RELAY OUTPUTS DURING NORMAL STANDBY MODE. VOLT FREE RELAYS (PROGRAMMABLE) FAULT RELAY V / F RELAY FAULT NO NC C TB1, TB2 NO NC C TB3
NOTE: THE TROUBLE RELAY CONTACTS ARE SHOWN IN THE UNPOWERED STATE.
SIGNAL SOUNDER
JP1 JP2 JP3 JP4
ON OFF ON OFF
2. SOUNDER/RELEASE CIRCUITS ARE RATED AT 24VDC, 2A POWER LIMITED. SUPERVISORY CURRENT - 2.4mA/CIRCUIT
3. ALL RELAY OUTPUTS (VOLT/FREE RELAYS AND V/F RELAY) ARE RATED AT 30VDC, 1A.
4. SIGNAL OUTPUT REQUIRE THE USE OF END OF LINE RESISTOR (EOR) 10K, 0.5W; NOT SUPPLIED WITH PANEL. AVAILABLE AS PART NO. 06-129520-001 (KIT OF 50).
5. IF MP01 IS CONFIGURED AS A RELEASING OUTPUT, A 220 OHM (5W MIN.) RESISTOR COULD BE USED TO SIMULATE THE CIRCUIT IF NO SOLENOID IS CONNECTED. CAUTION: DO NOT USE RESISTOR IF SOLENOID IS CONNECTED.
6. TO GUARANTEE THE REQUIRED VOLTAGE AT THE RELEASING DEVICE, THE FOLLOWING TABLE SHALL BE USED.
EX: TO DETERMINE THE TOTAL LOOP LENGTH, MEASURE THE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE CONTROL HEAD AND THE CONTROL PANEL TERMINAL BLOCK, THEN MULTIPLY BY TWO.
I-3
DEVICE
PART NO.
890181 899175 895630 897494 486500 486500-01 81-100000-001
06-118329-001
06-118384-001
FM SOLENOID GROUP
A B,D E,G
MAXIMUM OF ONE #12 AWG WIRE PER TERMINAL.
PEGAsys
July 2003
PEGAsys
TB4 OR TB5
B 3 4 + B 3 4 -
CLASS A Z" STYLE
TB4 OR TB5
CLASS B Y" STYLE
EOR
EOR = 10K OHM
N/A
July 2003 I-4 76-100016-001
SOLENOID PART NO. 890181, 895630

(U.L. LISTED) (U.L. LISTED)
SOLENOID PART NO. 897494
76-100016-001
SINGLE SOLENOID TB4 TB4 TB4 SINGLE SOLENOID
SINGLE CONTROL HEAD
GROUPS A, B, D, E, G
(U.L. LISTED)
S 2 3 S S
2 L L
2 -
2 -
3 +
NOTES: NOTES: 1. FOR JUMPER ARRANGEMENTS SEE NOTE 1 ON SHEET 2. 2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 0.7 OHMS.
3 +
3 +
NOTES:
1. FOR JUMPER ARRANGEMENTS SEE NOTE 1 ON SHEET 2.
1. FOR JUMPER ARRANGEMENTS SEE NOTE 1 ON SHEET 2. 2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE: 2.3 OHMS - GROUP A 1.5 OHMS - GROUPS B, D 2.5 OHMS - GROUP E, G
2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 0.6 OHMS.
SOLENOID PART NO. 899175

(U.L. LISTED)
SOLENOID PART NO. 486500, 486500-01
SINGLE SOLENOID TB4 TB4
SINGLE SOLENOID
I-5
BLK
BLK L S
MICROSWITCH
BLU YEL
2 -
2 -
WHT
SAFETY FUSE
SOLENOID
3 +
NOTES:
RED
3 +
NOTES:
1. FOR JUMPER ARRANGEMENTS SEE NOTE 1 ON SHEET 2.
1. FOR JUMPER ARRANGEMENTS SEE NOTE 1 ON SHEET 2. 2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 6.0 OHMS.
PEGAsys
July 2003
24 VDC (RED) RET (BLK) RS232 PORT FOR COMMUNICATION WITH CCM. CONTACT INPUT DEVICES: PRODUCT NO'S. 70-407002-00X 70-407003-001 70-407004-001 70-407008-001 70-407008-002 1. SMART DEVICES MAY UTILIZE T-TAP WIRING METHOD IN CLASS B, STYLE 4 CONFIGURATION ONLY. 2. MAXIMUM OF 255 LOOP DEVICES PER RX/TX LOOP. ANY COMBINATION OF DEVICE TYPE IS ACCEPTABLE. 3. MAXIMUM 20 LOOP ISOLATORS EXCLUDING ONE ON RX/TX CAN BE INSTALLED ON PC LINE. NO MORE THAN 30 LOOP DEVICES BETWEEN TWO ADJACENT LOOP ISOLATORS. STYLE 6 (4-WIRE) PC LINE CONFIGURATION IS RECOMMENDED TO FULLY UTILIZE LOOP ISOLATION FUNCTION. 4. ARRANGEMENTS FOR PC LINE WIRING SMART DETECTORS USED: PRODUCT NO'S. 70-401001-000 70-401004-000 71-401001-000 71-401004-000 JUMPER STYLE 6 SHORTED IN IN OPEN OUT LOOP ISOLATORS: PRODUCT NO.'S RXTX 74-200012-001 ELECT. BOX 74-200012-002 BASE MOUNT 74-200012-004 ORION XT INTERFACE MODULE PRODUCT NO. 77-297103-000 OPEN OUT SHORTED SHORTED W1 & W2 SEE NOTE 4
W1 W2
PEGAsys
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721
J3
July 2003
24 VDC FROM POWER SUPPLY
NOTES: 70-402001-100 71-402001-100 70-404001-100 70-403001-XXX
RX/TX MODULE
J1 J2
STYLE 4 OPEN IN IN
STYLE 6 w/LOOP ISO. STYLE 7
JP2 JP3
RELAY OUTPUT DEVICES: PRODUCT NO.'S 70-408002-000 70-408003-000 70-408004-001
RX/TX 76-100005-001
RX/TX 4.2- WHEN LOOP ISOLATOR USED: PLUG IN THE LOOP ISOLATOR (RXTX) 74-200012-001
LED1 LED2
LOOP ISOLATOR RX/TX
4.1- STYLE SEVEN (7) REQUIRES THE USE OF LOOP ISOLATORS, THE RXTX MODULE REQUIRES THE USE OF ONE (1) P/N 74-200012-001 ISOLATOR MODULE TO OPERATE IN THE STYLE 7 CONFIGURATION.
CPU RESET RXTX. MAKE SURE THAT UNEVEN PINS ARE INTERCONNECTED. 5. MAXIMUM OF ONE #12 AWG WIRE PER TERMINAL. (OPTIONAL) LOOP ISOLATOR 74-200012-001 SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS
AND INTERCONNECT IT USING FLEX CABLES TO J3 ON
PC LINE NORMAL
SW1
SHORT-1
CPU RESET
SW2
I-6
1
SHORT-2
PC LINE RESET
T1
T1 J3 JP3 JP2
12
1 2 3 4
MAX VOLTAGE: MIN. VOLTAGE: MAX. LINE CAPACITANCE: MAX. LINE RESISTANCE: MAX. NUMBER OF RCU'S: MAX. RIPPLE VOLTAGE:
26.4 VDC 19.0 VDC 0.25 uF 26.0 OHMS 255 100 mV RMS
LED 1 - RED LED INDICATES RXTX RESET WHEN ON.

LED 2 - GREEN LED INDICATES NORMAL OPERATION OF RXTX PC LINE
SEE NOTE 4
TRANSMITTER WHEN BLINKING. SW 1 - CPU RESET. SW 2 - PC LINE REST/DISCONNECT 24V FROM TERM. 2 & 3.
TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Receiver/Transmitter Module (PEGAsys)
RX/TX ASSEMBLY 74-200005-001
76-100016-001
CLASS A, STYLE 6 SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT W/LOOP ISOLATORS

3 7 LOOP ISOLATOR LOOP ISOLATOR
76-100016-001
ZONE 2 CLASS A, STYLE 6 SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT
3 3 7 7 3 1 2
ZONE 1
ZONE 3
DETECTOR BASE
4 L LOOP ISOLATOR LOOP ISOLATOR S
CLASS B, STYLE 4 SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT

1 L 2 3 4 L S 1234 S
TB1 OF RX/TX
I-7
CLASS A, STYLE 7 SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT NOTES:
LOOP ISOLATOR 3 7 ZONE 2 LOOP ISOLATOR LOOP ISOLATOR LOOP ISOLATOR
1. LOOP ISOLATOR DEVICES ARE POLARIZED. SEE DETAILED INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM. 2. DENOTES SMART DETECTOR CONTACT INPUT & RELAY OUTPUT DEVICE. THIS DEVICE IS NOT POLARIZED. 3. FOR CONNECTIONS TO THE LOOP DEVICES OTHER THAN LOOP ISOLATORS, SEE INSTALLATION DIAGRAMS OF THE PARTICULAR DEVICE. 4.
L S 3 7
- FOR POWER LIMITED CIRCUITS. - FOR SUPERVISED CIRCUITS. 5. FOR STYLE 7 WIRING BETWEEN DEVICES AND ADJACENT ISOLATORS MUST BE IN CONDUIT, NO MORE THAN 20 FEET FROM DEVICE. 6. MAXIMUM 20 LOOP ISOLATORS PER RX/TX LOOP, EXCLUDING ISOLATOR MOUNTED ON RX/TX MODULE.
3 ZONE 1 SEE NOTE 5 7 ZONE 3
TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Receiver/Transmitter Module (PEGAsys)

LOOP ISOLATOR L 1234 S
LOOP ISOLATOR
NOTE: ADJACENT LOOP ISOLATORS MUST BE WITHIN 20 FEET OF DEVICE WITH WIRING IN CONDUIT.
PEGAsys
July 2003
TB1 OF RX/TX
LOOP ISOLATOR 74-200012-001 MUST BE INSTALLED ON RX/TX WHEN USING LOOP ISOLATORS.
AC LINE POWER IN AC NEUTRAL IN EARTH GROUND (120/240VAC, 60/50Hz) 24VDC POWER (4.0ADC) 24VDC RETURN SUPERVISION NOTES: 1. THE TROUBLE RELAY IS SHOWN IN THE UNPOWERED STATE AND WILL TRANSFER UPON ANY POWER SUPPLY TROUBLE OR POWER OFF CONDITION. FROM POWER SUPPLY #1 CURRENT SHARING COMMON FOR BOTH POWER SUPPLIES 24VDC POWER (4.0ADC) FROM POWER SUPPLY #2 SUPERVISION 24VDC RETURN
PEGAsys
24V
RET
SHARE
24V
RET
SEE NOTE 7
NO
GREEN LED
TBL RLY
C NC
SPV
SPV
AC OUT 1 2 AC IN
L L N G
DC IN 1
DC IN 2
ASHLAND, MA 01721
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
W4- INSTALL THE JUMPER IF THE POWER SUPPLY BOARD IS HOOKED AS THE LAST DEVICE ON THE RS485 I/O BUS. REMOVE THE JUMPER OTHERWISE.
1 2
BAT
RS485
MOTHER BD CCM
RET
24V
RET
24V
06-129562-002 AUX 1 AUX 2
SYSTEM POWER
July 2003
TROUBLES INCLUDE: - MICROCONTROLLER FAILURE - AC FAIL - BATTERY FAIL - POWER SUPPLY FAIL - GROUND FAULT (POSITIVE OR NEGATIVE) - LOW BATTERY - COMMUNICATIONS FAILURE 15A FUSE W1- CUT OUT W1 TO CONFIGURE THE POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY SO THAT IT MAY USE A BATTERY PAIR CHARGED BY ANOTHER ASSEMBLY. CAUTION: THE VOLTAGE FOR THE TWO BATTERIES IN SERIES MUST BE GREATER THAN 22VDC BEFORE CONNECTING BATTERIES TO PANEL.
S3
SYS GND
FIELD INSTALLATION
AC LINE OUT TO POWER SUPPLY #2
AC NEUTRAL OUT TO POWER SUPPLY #2
FACTORY INSTALLATION
AC LINE OUT TO POWER SUPPLY #1
AC. NEUTRAL OUT TO POWER SUPPLY #1
TROUBLE OUTPUT VOLT-FREE RELAY CONTACTS RATED AT 2A, 30VDC
(NOTE 1)
THE GREEN LED, DS1, SHALL REMAIN ILLUMINATED AS LONG AS THE TROUBLE RELAY IS IN THE N.O. POSITION.
(NOTE 2)
(NOTE 2)
2. WHEN AN AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUT IS CONFIGURED TO BE RESETTABLE, THE OUTPUT SHALL TRANSFER FROM 24VDC TO 0V WHENEVER THE MICROCONTROLLER IS IN RESET. THIS RESET MAY BE CAUSED EITHER BY SOFTWARE OR BY MANUAL RESET OF THE MICROCONTROLLER BY PRESSING S3. THE OUTPUT SHALL BE MAINTAINED AT 0V AS LONG AS THE MICROCONTROLLER IS HELD IN RESET.
I-8
S1
A
(2) 12VDC SEALED LEAD ACID BATTERIES
S2
15A
24V
1 2
R
RET 24V
RS-485 TWISTED PAIR CONNECTION. (NOTE 5)

R
RET 24V
+ -
3.
S L R
- FOR SUPERVISED CIRCUITS. - FOR POWER LIMITED CIRCUITS. - FOR REGULATED OUTPUTS, 20.4VDC TO 26.4VDC.
I/O BUS COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE FROM CCM

R
RET
24VDC POWER TO CCM FACTORY 24VDC RETURN INSTALLATION 24VDC POWER TO RX/TX 24VDC RETURN 24VDC POWER TO MOTHERBOARD FIELD 24VDC RETURN INSTALLATION
I/O BUS COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE TO MOTHERBOARD

L L
4. BATTERIES SHALL BE REPLACED EVERY 48 MONTHS OR AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODES. 5. ALL RS-485 INTERCONNECTIONS MUST BE WITHIN THE SAME ROOM WITH THE MAIN PANEL. 6. SYS GND TERMINAL OF TB6 SHALL BE USED TO INTERCONNECT 24 V RETURNS BETWEEN MULTIPLE POWER SUPPLIES.
S1 AND S2 USE TO ADDRESS POWER SUPPLY/CHARGER ASSEMBLY.
S3: HARD RESET OF MICROPROCESSOR ON POWER SUPPLY/CHARGER ASSEMBLY BOARD.
24VDC AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUT #2, POWER LIMITED TO 1.5A 24VDC RETURN 24VDC AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUT #1, POWER LIMITED TO 1.5A 24VDC RETURN FIELD INSTALLATION
TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Power Supply (PEGAsys)
7. SOLDER A 0 OHM, 1/4 W ESISTOR ACROSS W5 PADS WHEN USING 220 VAC POWER.
76-100016-001
WHT BLK/WHT ORN RED RED BLK BLK VIO

AC OUT 2 1
24V SPV 24V RET RET SPV
MAIN POWER SUPPLY
SHARE
76-100016-001
AC IN
L L N G
DC IN 1
DC IN 2
I-9
WHT BLK/WHT
BLK
TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Power Supply (PEGAsys)
PEGAsys
AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY
BLK VIO RED RED ORN
July 2003
MODULE
NOTES:
1 2
1 2
SQB
RELEASING
July 2003
06-129567-001
1. MAXIMUM OUTPUT CURRENTS: SIGNAL CIRCUIT - 2.0 A RELEASE CIRCUIT - 2.4 A (MOMENTARY) - 2.0 A (CONTINUOUS) SUPERVISORY CURRENT - 2.4 mA/CIRCUIT 2. NOMINAL VOLTAGE 24.0 VDC
ON S4 S3
PEGAsys
7. MODULE ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT
RESET SWITCH SEE NOTE 6 4. A 220 OHM (5W MIN) RESISTOR COULD BE USED TO SIMULATE THE RELEASING CIRCUIT IF NO SOLENOID IS CONNECTED. CAUTION: DO NOT USE RESISTOR IF SOLENOID IS CONNECTED. 5 6 7 8 OFF OFF OFF OFF
MODULE ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT
3. SIGNAL OUTPUT REQUIRE THE USE OF END OF LINE RESISTOR (EOR) - 10K, 0.5W; NOT SUPPLIED WITH PANEL. AVAILABLE AS PART NO. 06-129520-001 (KIT OF 50). MODULE ADDRESS 1 2 3 4
TROUBLE LED
SWITCH POSITION S4,1 S3,2 ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF
S4,2 ON OFF ON OFF
RELEASE 76-200001-001
SEE NOTE 11 SEE NOTE 6
S1
SOL
ON ON OFF OFF
ON OFF ON OFF
8. RELEASING OUTPUT DEVICES
AUXILIARY POWER
5. TO GUARANTEE THE REQUIRED VOLTAGE AT THE RELEASING DEVICE, THE FOLLOWING TABLE SHALL BE USED. EX: TO DETERMINE THE TOTAL LOOP LENGTH, MEASURE THE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE CONTROL HEAD AND THE CONTROL PANEL TERMINAL BLOCK, THEN MULTIPLY BY TWO.
SOLENOIDS COMMENT 890181
1 2 3 4 5 6
RELEASE CIRCUITS
DEVICE 18 AWG
TB1
PART NO.
WIRE LENGTH (FT.) 14 AWG 16 AWG
I-10
RESISTANCE (min.) "ON" TIME COMMENT
MAXIMUM OF ONE #12 AWG WIRE PER TERMINAL. S1 SOL SQB DUAL SINGLE SOLENOID SOLENOID X X X -
RELEASING OUTPUT DEVICES SPECIFICATION
7 8 9 10 11 12
SIGNAL CIRCUITS 12
RELEASE MODULE KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721
899175 895630 897494 486500 486500-01 81-100000-001 -- 06-118329-001 06-118384-001
890181 899175 895630 897494 486500 486500-01 81-100000-001 200 200 200 240 2000 2000 1460 800 800 570 800 340 2000 760 480 1200 120 120 120 150 1200 1200 915 06-118329-001 06-118384-001 1440 1440 940 1570 760 500 760 FM SOLENOID GROUP A B,D E,G 3000
12 AWG 300 300 300 380 3000 3000 2300
FM GROUPS SPRINKLER SOLENOIDS A,B,D,E,G
480 300 525
340 220 370
FM APPROVED ONLY. NOT UL LISTED. UL LISTED ONLY. NOT FM APPROVED.
DEVICE
Imax.
9. FOR SPECIFIC SIGNAL DEVICE INFORMATION REFER TO DATA SHEETS 75.XXX SERIES 10. S - FOR SUPERVISED CIRCUITS
6. THE FOLLOWING SWITCHES MUST BE SET FOR SOLENOID(S). SWITCH S1 POSITION ASSIGNMENTS
L - FOR POWER LIMITED CIRCUITS 11. JUMPERS W1 & W2 MUST BE CUT OUT WHEN AUXILIARY POWER INPUT IS USED.
890181 899175 895630 897494 486500 486500-01 81-100000-001 06-118329-001 06-118384-001

OFF
-- FM APPROVED ONLY. NOT UL LISTED. UL LISTED ONLY. NOT FM APPROVED.
SWITCH S3,1 POSITION ASSIGNMENTS SOLENOIDS
12. MAXIMUM OF 8 MODULES PER SYSTEM.
FM SOLENOID GROUP
A B,D E,G
2.4 A 2.4 A 2.0 A 1.5 A 240 mA 240 mA 440 mA 225 mA 520 mA 458 mA 700 mA 420 mA 10 OHM 10.8 OHM 12 OHM 15.9 OHM 103 OHM 103 OHM 59 OHM 108 OHM 46 OHM 52 OHM 34 OHM 57 OHM MOMENTARY MOMENTARY MOMENTARY CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS
TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Release Module (PEGAsys)
76-100016-001
SOLENOID PART NO. 890181 AND 895630 (U.L. LISTED) SOLENOID PART NO. 897494 (U.L. LISTED)
SINGLE DUAL 1 CONTROL HEAD

S 3 2
TB1 TB1 1
L
76-100016-001
SINGLE SOLENOID TB1 1 TWO SOLENOIDS TB1 1 2
S
CONTROL HEAD 2 2 + 3 3 3 + 4 5 RET.

S L
2 +
+ 3
L
AUXILIARY POWER CONNECTION CKT #1

+24V TB1 1 2
4
S 3 2
CKT #1
4
S
CKT #1
L
4 5 6 6 + +
+ 5
L
+ 5 6
CKT #2
1
CKT #2
-
CKT #2
NOTES: 1. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. SWITCH S3,1 TO "OFF ". NOTES: 1. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. SWITCH S3, 1 TO "OFF ". 2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 0.7 OHMS.
NOTE: JUMPERS W1 & W2 TO BE REMOVED WHEN AUXILIARY POWER USED.
SOLENOID PART NO. 899175 TWO SOLENOIDS

TB1 1 1
S L
SOLENOID PART NO. 486500, 486500-01 (U.L. LISTED) SINGLE SOLENOID

TB1 1
L
SIGNAL CIRCUITS
SINGLE SOLENOID
TB1
TWO SOLENOIDS
TB1 1 2
S
TB1 7 8 + CKT #1
I-11
2 2 BLK 3
L
MICROSWITCH 2 RED 3 4
S
10K EOR
BLK 3 BLU WHT 4 + 5 6 BLK 5 BLU WHT

S L
+
-
+ + -
+ CKT #1
+ RED BLK 4 + CKT #2 RED 5

11 10
BLU
+ -
CKT #2
S
10K EOR
L
WHT 4 5 6 YEL BLK + SOLENOID -
YEL
YEL
SAFETY FUSE
6
S
BLK
L
6
12 +
CKT #2
10K EOR
NOTES: 1. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. SWITCH S3,1 TO "OFF ".
NOTES: 1. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. SWITCH S3, 1 TO "OFF ". 2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 6.0 OHMS.
PEGAsys
July 2003
July 2003
FM GROUP SPRINKLER SOLENOIDS GROUP A

(U.L. LISTED) SINGLE SOLENOID TWO SOLENOIDS TB1 1 1 1
L S
+
PEGAsys
GROUP B,D
(U.L. LISTED) SINGLE SOLENOID TWO SOLENOIDS TB1

L
TB1
TB1
1 2 2
+
2
S
+
2 3
-
3 3 4
S L
3 CKT #1 L
+
CKT #1
-
CKT #1 4
+
S S
+
4 4 S 5 6 CKT #2 6
-
5 CKT #2
-
5
-
CKT #2 6
NOTES: 1. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. SWITCH S3,1 TO "OFF ". 2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 2.3 OHMS.
NOTES: 1. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. SWITCH S3,1 TO "OFF ". 2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 1.5 OHMS.
I-12
GROUP E,G
(U.L. LISTED) SINGLE SOLENOID TB1 1 2
+
TWO SOLENOIDS TB1 1

L S
+
2 3 3 CKT #1
L
-
S
+
4 5
-
4 5 CKT #2 6
S L
-
76-100016-001
6 NOTES: 1. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. SWITCH S3,1 TO "OFF ". 2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 2.5 OHMS.
1 2 1 2 1 2
AUXILIARY POWER NOT USED 1

1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
12
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721
12
76-100016-001
06-129569-001 SIGNAL AUDIBLE MODULE
ON
RESET SWITCH TROUBLE LED SEE NOTE 4 MODULE ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT SEE NOTE 5
MODULE ADDRESS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW1,2 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF SWITCH POSITION SW2,2 SW1,1 ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
NOTES: 1. MAXIMUM OUTPUT CURRENTS: SIGNAL CIRCUIT - 2.0 A SUPERVISORY CURRENT - 2.4 mA/CIRCUIT 2. NOMINAL VOLTAGE 24.0 VDC 3. SIGNAL OUTPUT REQUIRE THE USE OF END OF LINE RESISTOR (EOR) - 10K, 0.5W; NOT SUPPLIED WITH PANEL. AVAILABLE AS PART NO. 06-129520-001 (KIT OF 50). 4. MODULE ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT
SIG. AUD. 76-100003-001
TB1 SEE NOTE 8
SOUNDER CIRCUITS 1-4
5. EITHER SOUNDER OUTPUT (2) MAY BE CONFIGURED FOR EITHER 2 CLASS B, STYLE "Y" OR 1 CLASS A, STYLE "Z", USING JUMPER AND DIP SWITCH SETTINGS SHOWN ON SHEETS 2 & 3. 6. FOR SPECIFIC SIGNAL DEVICE INFORMATION REFER TO DATA SHEETS 75.XXX SERIES. ONLY POLARIZED SIGNALLING DEVICES TO BE USED. 7.
S
I-13
- FOR SUPERVISED CIRCUITS

L
- FOR POWER LIMITED CIRCUITS 8. JUMPERS W9 & W10 MUST BE CUT OUT WHEN AUXILIARY POWER INPUT IS USED. 9. MAXIMUM OF 8 MODULES PER SYSTEM. 10. MAXIMUM OF ONE #12 AWG WIRE PER TERMINAL.
TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Signal Audible Module (PEGAsys)
PEGAsys
July 2003
July 2003
PEGAsys
4 CLASS B, STYLE "Y"

2 CLASS B, STYLE "Y" AND 1 CLASS A, STYLE "Z"
TB1 5 6 7 + 8 + 9 10 10K EOR
TB1 5 CIRCUIT 1
L S L S
L L S
CIRCUIT 1
10K 10K EOR CIRCUIT 2
6 7 + 8 + 9 10K EOR 10K EOR
EOR
CIRCUIT 2
CIRCUIT 3
CIRCUIT 3
10K CIRCUIT 4
L S
10K
10 11 + 12 +
SWITCHES W6
W1 ON ON W2 JUMPERS W3 ON W4 OFF W5 OFF
EOR
EOR
11 + 12 +
SWITCHES W6 OFF W7 OFF W8 ON SW2,1 ON SW3,2 OFF
I-14
W5 ON ON ON OFF ON ON W7 W8 SW2,1 SW3,2
JUMPERS
W1
W2
W3
W4
ON
ON
ON
OFF
AUXILIARY POWER CONNECTION TB1 +24VDC AUXILIARY POWER 1 RET 2
76-100016-001
2 CLASS A, STYLE "Z"

TB1 5
CIRCUIT 1
1 CLASS A, STYLE "Z" AND 2 CLASS B, STYLE "Y"

TB1 5
CIRCUIT 1
76-100016-001
6
L S
10K EOR
6
-
10K EOR
7
+ +
7 8
+
8
+
9
CIRCUIT 3
9
L S L S CIRCUIT 3
10
10K EOR
10
10K EOR 10K EOR CIRCUIT 4
11
+
11
+
12
+
12
+
I-15
SWITCHES W6 W7 W8 SW2,1 SW3,2
JUMPERS
JUMPERS W1 OFF W2 OFF W3 OFF W4 ON W5 ON W6 ON W7 ON W8 OFF
SWITCHES SW2,1 OFF SW3,2 ON
W1 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
W2
W3
W4
W5
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
PEGAsys
July 2003
PEGAsys
RELAY 76-10004-001
TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Relay Output Module (PEGAsys)

July 2003 I-16 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
CITY TIE 76-100002-001
TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram City Tie Module (PEGAsys)

76-100016-001 I-17 July 2003
PEGAsys
TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram City Tie Module (PEGAsys)

July 2003 I-18 76-100016-001
J9
RS-485
76-100016-001
TB2 W1
COM TBL COM ALM SIG GND 485A 485B RET
R1
J1 J3
J2
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
+24V
TB1
1. POWER CONNECTIONS: 1). TB1 BRINGS 24VDC POWER FROM POWER SUPPLY TB5 OR TB6 TERMINAL BLOCKS. 2). 24VDC POWER TO RX/TX MODULES (J1) FROM TB5 OR TB6 ON POWER SUPPLY. 3). TERMINAL TB1 CAN BE USED TO BRING POWER TO OUTPUT MODULES IN THE AUXILIARY BOX.
I-19
2. COMMUNICATIONS: 1). J9 CONNECTS TO CCM PORT AND PROVIDES OUTPUT MODULES WITH RS485 COMMUNICATIONS. 2). J1 THROUGH J8 TO BE USED TO PLUG IN OUTPUT MODULES AND SUPPLY THEM WITH +24VDC POWER AND RS485 COMMUNICATIONS. 3). RS232 COMMUNICATIONS FOR RX/TX MODULE TO BE PROVIDED THROUGH PHONE CABLE PLUGGED INTO "RX/TX" PORT ON CCM. 4). TB2 TO BE USED TO INTERCONNECT TO AUXILIARY PANELS' MOTHER BOARD AND POWER SUPPLIES TO PROVIDE RS485 COMMUNICATIONS. 1. USE RED WIRES FOR +24VDC AND BLACK FOR RET. 2. JUMPER W1 SHOULD BE IN. MAKE SURE THAT JUMPER W4 ON POWER SUPPLY CONTROL BOARD IS OUT.
TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Basic I/0 Motherboard (PEGAsys)
NOTE:
PEGAsys
July 2003
PEGAsys
TO CCM RS-485 PORT TO POWER SUPPLY TO CCM RX/TX PORT
UT TP LE OU DU MO
TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Basic Output Motherboard (PEGAsys)

July 2003 I-20 76-100016-001
/TX E RXDUL MO
JP10
RS-232
76-100016-001
TB11
RET +24V
TB8
RS-485
TB7
TB6 TB5 TB4 TB3 TB2
TB1
JP9
W1
JP8 JP7 JP6 JP5 JP4 JP3 JP2
TB10
JP1
RET
J1 J4 J6
J2 J3 J5 J7
+24V
TB9
1. POWER CONNECTIONS:
1). TB9 AND TB11 BRING 24VDC POWER FROM POWER SUPPLY TB5 AND TB6.
I-21
2). TB1 THROUGH TB8 TO BE USED TO CONNECT 24VDC POWER TO RX/TX MODULES.
3). TERMINAL TB9 CAN BE USED TO BRING POWER TO OUTPUT MODULES IN THE AUXILIARY BOX.
2. COMMUNICATIONS:
1). JP10 CONNECTS TO CCM MODULE AND SUPPLIES RS232 COMMUNICATION FOR RX/TX MODULES.
2). JP1 THROUGH JP8 TO BE CONNECTED TO RX/TX MODULES J2 CONNECTORS TO PROVIDE RS232 COMMUNICATIONS.
3). JP9 CONNECTS TO CCM PORT AND PROVIDES OUTPUT MODULES WITH RS485 COMMUNICATIONS.
4). J1 THROUGH J7 TO BE USED TO PLUG IN OUTPUT MODULES AND SUPPLY THEM WITH +24VDC POWER AND RS485 COMMUNICATIONS.
5). TB10 TO BE USED TO INTERCONNECT TO AUXILIARY PANEL MOTHERBOARD AND POWER SUPPLIES TO PROVIDE RS485 COMMUNICATIONS. 1. USE RED WIRES FOR +24 VDC AND BLACK FOR RET. 2. INSTALL THE W1 JUMPER IF THE MOTHERBOARD IS INSTALLED AS THE LAST COMPONENT ON THE RS-485 COMMUNICATIONS BUS. OTHERWISE REMOVE THE JUMPER. 3. THE FIRST RX/TX MODULE (LOOP #1) SHOULD BE ALWAYS ON THE FAR RIGHT AND INTERCONNECTED TO JP1 AND TB1. ALL CONSECUTIVE RX/TX MODULES SHOULD BE PLUGGED FROM RIGHT TO LEFT STARTING FROM THE FIRST RX/TX. (CONNECTOR NUMBER IS ASSOCIATED WITH LOOP NUMBER).
TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Multi-Loop Motherboard (PEGAsys)
NOTE:
PEGAsys
July 2003
PEGAsys
UT TP LE U O DU MO
TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Multi-Loop Motherboard (PEGAsys)

July 2003 I-22 76-100016-001
MO
/TX E RXDUL
GRAY ORANGE BROWN WHITE BN TO REMOVE CONTACT DEVICE TO CATHODE TO ANODE 1. RED AND BLACK WIIRES ARE NON-POLERIZED POWER INPUTS. REFER TO RX/TX (CAT. NO. 76-100005-001 WIRING DIAGRAM FOR CONNECTION TO SMART DETECTOR MULTIPLEX TRUNK CIRCUIT AND CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS.
76-100016-001
TO REMOTE LED NOTES
N/O
WH EOL SEE NOTE 3 3. EOL RESISTOR: 820 OHM .5 WATT (FENWAL PART NO. 06-129025-001)
EOL
2. SUPERVISED LINE FOR REMOTE CONTACT DEVICE CONNECTION. CAUTION: CONTACT DEVICE MUST BE IN THE SAME ROOM AS ADDRESSABLE CONTACT INPUT DEVICE, WITH ALL WIRING ENCLOSED IN CONDUIT, AND A MAXIMUM LENGTH OF 150 FT.
PROTECTIVE COVERING UL LABEL
4. TO REMOTE LED (FENWAL PART NO. 70-410001-000) OBSERVE POLARITY: ORANGE (ANODE), GRAY (CATHODE) CAUTION: LED MUST BE IN THE SAME ROOM AS ADDRESSABLE CONTACT INPUT DEVICE, WITH ALL WIRING ENCLOSED IN CONDUIT AND A MAXIMUM LENGTH 50FT.. LED CIRCUIT IS NOT SUPERVISED. 5. MAXIMUM CURRENT REQUIREMENTS STANDBYALARM 310uA 380uA
TYPICAL CONFIGURATIONS
N.O. CONTACT DEVICES
6. SMART DETECTOR PRODUCT NO.S 70-40XXXX-XXX AND 71-40XXXX-XXX MAY BE MIXED ON THE SAME MULTIPLEX TRUNK CIRCUIT, BUT SHALL NOT EXCEED 255 TOTAL DEVICES PER CIRCUIT, 2040 PER SYSTEM.
MANUAL PULL STATION BK SEE NOTE 1 EOL RD
7. TYPICAL PULES RATE: NORMAL: ALARM: TROUBLE:
9 SECONDS 2 SECONDS NO LED PULSING 8. REFER TO SYSTEM OPERATION MANUAL FOR APPLICATION OF ADDRESSABLE CONTACT INPUT DEVICE. 9. WIRING INFORMATION SHOWN FOR 70-407002-00X THRU 70-407004-00X.
I-23
EOL
WATERFLOW
CAT. NO. -000 -001
DESCRIPTION NORMALLY OPEN NORMALLY CLOSED FOR SUPERVISORY USE ONLY
TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Addressable Contact Input Device NO/NC (Obsolete)
SEE NOTE 3
PEGAsys
July 2003
July 2003
BROWN ( N/C ) ORANGE ( COM ) SEE NOTE 2 FIELD CONNECTION WHITE ( N/O ) NOTES 1. RED AND BLACK WIIRES ARE NON-POLERIZED POWER INPUTS. REFER TO RX/TX (CAT. Number 30-402001-000 & 76-100005-001) WIRING DIAGRAM FOR CONNECTION TO SMART DETECTOR MULTIPLEX TRUNK CIRCUIT AND CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS. CAUTION: 2. RELAY OUTPUTS ARE NOT SUPERVISED. RATING: 2A, 30 VDC (RESISTIVE) .6A, 120 VAC (RESISTIVE) 3. MAXIMUM CURRENT REQUIREMENTS: STANDBY: 325uA
PEGAsys
N.C.
COM.
N.O.
PROTECTIVE COVERING
UL LABEL
4. SMART DETECTOR PRODUCT NO.S 70-40XXXX-XXX AND 71-40XXXX-XXX MAY BE MIXED ON THE SAME MULTIPLEX TRUNK CIRCUIT, BUT SHALL NOT EXCEED 255 TOTAL DEVICES PER CIRCUIT, 2040 PER SYSTEM.
I-24
LED (SEE NOTE 5)
5. TYPICAL PULSE RATE: RELAY RESET (STANDBY): RELAY SET: TROUBLE STATE:
9 SECONDS 2 SECONDS NO LED PULSING 6. REFER TO SYSTEM OPERATION MANUAL FOR APPLICATION OF ADDRESSABLE RELAY OUTPUT 7. MOUNTS IN 4 SQUARE ELECTRICAL BOX. 8. MUST BE INSTALLED IN A U.L. LISTED GANG BOX.. 9. WIRING INFORMATION SHOWN FOR 70-408002-000 THRU 70-408003-000.
RD
BK
TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Addressable Relay Output Device (Obsolete)
SEE NOTES 1 & 9
76-100016-001
SmartOne TM
TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Addressable Contact Input Device NO/NC

AI, N/O
AI, N/C
76-100016-001
Typical N.O. Initiating Devices
NOTES 1. Maximum 25 resistance per wire for initiating circuit. For a total circuit wiring resistance of 50 max. Terminal connection supports wiring from #18 AWG (0.75 mm2) to #14 AWG (1.5 mm2) Refer to Control Panel Manual for addressable loop wiring specification. 4. 5. 6. 7. Maximum 10 VDC @ 1 mA. This module will not support 2-wire smoke detectors. N/O initiating device circuit is NFPA Class B/Style B. Rating on LED circuit: 26 VDC Max. 7 mA Max. If not used leave terminals open circuit. 8. All wiring is power limited and supervised.
See Notes: 1, 2, and 4
See Note 3 (+) (-)

3.
(+) PC Line Out Typical N.C. Supervisory Devices
EOL (Listed 10KW Resistor)

2.
PC Line In See Note 3
(-)
I-25
See Note 7
EOL (Listed 10KW Resistor)
9.
The AI, N/C Device is intended for use within the control equipment providing the normally closed contact. 10. The initiating device and remote LED annunciator (if used) must be located in the same room as the AI. 11. Use Listed 10K Ohm end-of-line resistor, P/N 70-411001-005.
PEGAsys
July 2003
SmartOne
TM
PC PC PC PC (+) (-) (+) (-)
N/C
COM
N/O
July 2003
PEGAsys
N/O
7 6
NOTES
COM N/C
5
1.
Field Connections
AO must be installed in the same room as the device it is controlling . Terminal connection supports wiring from #18 AWG (0.75 mm2) to #14 AWG (1.5 mm2)
See Note 3 (+) (-) PC Line Out

3. 2.
See Note 3
(+)
PC Line In
(-)
Refer to Control Panel Manual for addressable loop wiring specification. 4. PC Line wiring is power limited and supervised.
I-26
SHEET 1 of 1
REVISION -
DRAWING No. New Design
TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Addressable Relay Output Device
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
APPENDIX J PEGASYS NETWORK INTERFACE CARD

J-1 INTRODUCTION the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) Program manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015), which should be referred to. Note: It is not possible to download configuration information to all the NICs on a network simultaneously. Each NIC (node) must be configured independently.
The PEGAsys Network Interface Card (NIC) provides the capability for peer-to-peer communication between PEGAsys fire/suppression control panels (nodes). The NIC mounts as a daughter card on the PEGAsys Central Control Module (CCM). Up to thirty-two (32) nodes may be networked to form groups. Groups are numbered into logical groupings that delineate the extended coverage area and simplify programming. Note: PEGAsys SL/ML control units may be networked with PEGAsys LV Control Units
J1 DS4 DS2 DS3 DS1
The operator can set network configuration options on the PEGAsys in three ways: Via the keypad on the Central Control Module. Via PCS. Via a dumb terminal.
B2NA2 B1NA1 B2IA2
B1IA1
N2 C26
N1
I2
I1
Below are the network options which can be configured for each node and are stored in that panel's memory. Paragraphs detailing each option follow: Network Style: None, Single-Channel (Style 4), or Redundant Channel (Style 7). Node number: 0 to 32. Network group number: 0 to 32. Processing of network RESET messages: Enabled/Disabled. Processing of network SILENCE messages: Enabled/Disabled. Logging all events: Enabled/Disabled. Time resynchronization (resynch) period. Central Station. NETWORK STYLE
1 U12
CR2
K2
CR1 K3
K1 C27 1 U13
CR3
TB4
TB2
TB3
TB1
RV11
R23
U11 C12 GND +5 TP1 TP2 I1 R10 C13 Y1 TP3 TP4 TP5 1 U3 C14 U4 TP6 N1 N2 I2
RV12
K4
R46 R45 RV6 RV4 RV5 RV8 RV9 RV7 RV2 RV3 C20
RV10
R24
E8
E1
RV1
R25
R6
R5
R4
R3
E7
E3
E6
E5
E4
E2
R20 R41 R40 U20 1 U19 1
U18 1
R2
R36
C2
R22 1
C5 C11
C18
R21
1 U21 R44 U14 C9 1 C8 R7 R17 R1 U15 1 U17 U16 C22 R32 U10 C16 1 R12 C25 1 R19
R13
U5
R43
C10
C1
R14
+
R29 R34
C3
U7
C23
U2 1
+
C4
R33
R15
U9
J-2.1.1
Q4 Q3
U8 1 R26 R28 R27 C17 1 1 R31 C15 R38 C24
R42
Q1 1 Q2 1 U6 R18 ASHLAND, MA 01721 C7
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
Figure J-1. Network Interface Card (NIC) Each PEGAsys control panel which is a network node (i.e., equipped with a NIC) may be assigned to a designated network group (numbered 1 through 32) or to network group 0. When an event occurs at a node, notification of the particular alarm, trouble, abort, etc., will be delivered to each of the other nodes on the network in the form of a message. J-2 J-2.1 CONFIGURATION/ADDRESSING Overview
Both of the two independent data channels can be enabled (Style 7), or either one of the channels can be disabled (Style 4). These data channels transmit network information from one node to the next, or bi-directionally if nodes are connected on either side of the transmitting node. In Style 7 configuration, data transfer is redundant so that if there is a failure on one channel, or its cable, the other channel will maintain communications. J-2.1.2 NODE NUMBER ASSIGNMENT
Nodes may be assigned a number from 0 to 32. Number 0 (the default) means that the node does not participate in any network activity. Any assignment from 1 to 32 means that the node actively participates in all pre-configured network activity.
Each node can be configured independently using any of the three methods described in the following paragraphs. The configuration process is dealt with in more detail in
76-100016-001 J-1 July 2003
PEGAsys
J-2.1.3 NETWORK GROUP NUMBER ASSIGNMENT work group 0, it can be silenced from any node on the network. J-2.1.6 EVENT LOGGING ENABLE/DISABLE
Nodes may be assigned to groups 0 through 32. A node assigned to network group 0 receives and processes messages received from all nodes only if configured to Log All Events." A node assigned to groups 1 through 32 will process only those messages from nodes in the same network group unless configured to Log All (Network) groups." J-2.1.4 RESET ENABLE/DISABLE
Enabling Log All Events causes all network events to be logged at this node. This includes the receipt of an ACKNOWLEDGE from a button on a remote node. Disabling will result in logging events only in its own (non-zero) group. J-2.1.7 TIME RESYNCHRONIZATION PERIOD (SET IN MINUTES)
Enabling RESET on a node means that it can be reset from any other node in its group. If it is assigned to network group 0, it can be reset from any node on the network. J-2.1.5 SILENCE ENABLE/DISABLE
Enabling SILENCE on a node means that it can be silenced from any other node in its group. If it is assigned to net-
A time-resynchronization message is broadcast on the network at intervals determined by the resynch period. If a node does not receive a resynchronization message during this interval, it uses its network connection to ask for the time, or uses its own locally stored time if its query does not result in a resynch message.
3. SET
1. TIME:DATE
2. PRINTER
3. DEVICES
4. PROGRAMMING
7. CLEAR EVENTS
7. NETWORK 8.RESYNCH NETWORK
CLEARS ALL EVENTS INITIATED FROM REMOTE NODES AND REQUESTS A RETRANSMISSION OF ALL EXISTING EVENTS FROM ALL NODES
1. STYLE
CH1: ENABLE/DISABLE
CH2: ENABLE/DISABLE
2. NODE NUMBER
NODE NUMBER ( 1 TO 64) GROUP NUMBER ( 1 TO 64)
0: STAND ALONE 0: NOT GROUPD
3. GROUP
4. ADD/RMV NODES
ADD OR REMOVE NODE#__ TO NODE# __
5. RESET EVENT
ENABLE/DISABLE NETWORK RESET ENABLE/DISABLE NETWORK SILENCE LOG ALL GROUP OR ONLY NETWORK EVENTS SET RESYNC: 0(off) OR 1-60000 MIN 1:ISOLATE NODE 2:DE-ISOLATE NODE
6. SILENCE EVENTS
7. LOG EVENTS
8. RESYNC PERIOD
9. ISOLATE
Figure J-2. Network Menu

July 2003 J-2 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Table J-1. Network Configuration Table
R emo te N o d e L o catio n AC K S IL E N C E R ESET L OG E V E N T S /E OC /R T S
N o te: If a node i s i n a non-zero group, i t wi ll accept button pushes and events from remote nodes i f All nodes i n group 0 All nodes i n same group All nodes i n di fferent groups L Yes L SE, L SE SE, L RE, L RE RE, L L Yes L
N o te: If a node i s i n group 0, i t wi ll accept button pushes and events from remote nodes i f confi gured as shown below: All nodes i n all groups L SE, L RE, L L
L: If node i s confi gured to "Log All Groups." SE: If node i s confi gured for remote SILENCE Enable. RE: If node i s confi gured for remote RESET Enable
J-2.1.8
CENTRAL STATION OPERATION
A node can be configured as a central station if that node is properly connected to a Silent Knight DACT, Model 5104. Central Station configuration automatically forces that node to Log All Events and also MP04, a volt-free relay on the CCM, is configured to activate on any alarm on any node in the network. J-2.2 Configuring Networking Options via the Display/Keypad
the serial PC Port. The software will initially use default values, with networking style set to None until changed by an operator. Note: Menus cannot be accessed with an alarm condition in effect. OPERATION
J-3
Networked PEGAsys panels may be configured to communicate differently depending on: Whether they are assigned to network group 0 or to groups 1 through 32. Whether they are communicating with other panels in their local group, or with panels in a remote group. A node which receives the network message from another node in the same non-zero group will process the network message appropriately, depending on its own installed program. The ACKNOWLEDGE function will be automatic, the SILENCE and RESET functions must be enabled in PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS), or by using the panels membrane keypad and LCD display panel. A node in a different non-zero network group configured to log all events will process network message(s) from any node in the entire network, depending on its own installed program. ACKNOWLEDGE is automatic, however SILENCE and RESET functions must be enabled in PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS), or by using the panels membrane keypad and LCD display panel. A node in network group zero, the default group, will not be recognized by any other nodes in network group zero for functions other than receiving messages unless it is configured to log all events in PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS).
July 2003
Configuration can be performed through the system menus which are accessible using the panels built-in membrane keypad and the LCD display panel. The software will initially use default values, with networking style set to None until changed by the operator. J-2.2 PEGAsys Panel Network Menus
Table J-1 summarizes these relationships. In more detail:
The menu structure of the PEGAsys has been upgraded to accommodate network configuration. All of the network options listed in Paragraph J-2.1 are configured via the front panel membrane keypad. In addition, the menu provides the ability to add or remove individual or groups of nodes to/from the network. The additions to the PEGAsys menu structure are diagramed in Figure J-2. J-2.3 Configuring Networking Options via PCS
Configuration of all CCM parameters, including network parameters, can be accomplished using PCS. The software will initially use default values, with networking Style set to None until changed by an operator. See the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) Program manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015) for details. J-2.4 Configuring Networking Options via a Dumb Terminal
Network configuration can be performed through use of the system menus using a dumb terminal attached to
76-100016-001 J-3
PEGAsys
Refer to Table J-1 for a summary of these relationships. Nodes can be added or deleted from network only via Network Menu. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION although somewhat more slowly than if both channels are in operation. J-4.2.2 MESSAGING
J-4
This paragraph describes the hardware used to implement the PEGAsys Network: J-4.1 Central Control Module (CCM) CPU Board Network Interface Card (NIC) Network Wiring Central Control Module CPU Board
When a node wishes to transmit over a network channel, the data is written to the NIC which sends the signals out to the bus for receipt by remote NICs. While a node is not transmitting data, the NIC reads the bus data traffic, and converts it to a form readable by the nodes software. Data communication will be configured on the NICs UART as 8 bits, no parity, 1 stop bit (8-N-1) and 9600 baud. The NIC will either transmit locally-produced data or receive and retransmit bus activity as a repeater. J-4.2.3 REPEATER (TRANSCEIVER)
The CCM board is a slightly modified version of the original CPU board designed so that the NIC will plug in as a daughter board. This modification has no effect on normal operation of the PEGAsys panel or system. J-4.2 Network Interface Card (NIC)
The NIC contains the hardware necessary for data-communication between network nodes. The network communication channels are EIA-485 bus lines. Each node uses one (1) NIC. The NIC performs the following functions: Dual-Channel Support Messaging Repeater Fail Safe Isolation
The NIC acts as a repeater, regenerating bus information as it moves through the NIC. Its bidirectional repeater function is implemented completely in hardware; no software is needed to control this process. The transceivers transmit and receive switching (in half-duplex mode) is also performed automatically by hardware. J-4.2.4 FAIL SAFE
If a power failure occurs in a node, the NIC includes a normally closed (NC) relay which maintains the communications integrity of the network. When the NIC loses power, the relay passes the network signals directly through the board. While the node without power will not participate in networking, this pass-through function allows all other network nodes to function normally while providing the proper trouble indications. J-4.2.5 ISOLATION
ISOLATED NETWORK MEDIUM TA1 TB1 Rx out Tx in Driver Enable Hardware Repeater Logic Rx/Tx Selection Logic TA2 TB2 Rx out Tx in Driver Enable
NON-ISOLATED NETWORK MEDIUM
One half of each channel is an isolated, floating RS-485 transceiver and the other half is a non-isolated, grounded RS-485 transceiver. This assures that the chassis of any two nodes are physically disconnected, eliminating the possibility of ground-loop current, while retaining the ability to detect ground faults. J-4.3 Network Wiring
RTS Rx
Tx
1/2 NETWORK INTERFACE CARD (NIC)
To CCM CPU
The panels are networked by attaching two twisted, unshielded-pair cables between the appropriate NICs. The node-to-node wire must not exceed a length of 4000 ft. and must be AWG 18 or heavier gauge. Under adverse conditions (for example, high electrical noise) unshielded, twisted pairs in conduit may be required. Connect panels together as shown in Figure J-4.
Figure J-3. NIC Block Diagram (Shown with Power to NIC Lost) J-4.2.1 DUAL CHANNEL SUPPORT
The NIC supports operation of Style 4 or Style 7 channels. Under normal operation with Style 7, network communication is divided between the two channels. In case of a short circuit or a break in any of the connecting wires, either channel by itself can execute all network communications,
July 2003
J-4
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Channel 2
J-7.1
NIC Installation
! CAUTION
Note B
Channel 1
Note A
B2NA2 B1NA1 B2IA2 B1IA1 B2NA2 B1NA1 B2IA2 B1IA1
PEGAsys system installation applications require that when a NIC is installed, predischarge and release-state activation, as well as abort-state activation are limited to the originating fire-alarm control panel. Note: Determine whether you have a newer or older CCM; a new CCM can be recognized by a singleline 20 pin header on the top edge on right side of board. If the networking upgrade is for an older system, the new CCM and Network Interface Card (NIC) will be separate. First replace the old CCM with the new CCM and then install the NIC. See following instructions for NIC installation.
! CAUTION
NETWORK INTERFACE CARD
NETWORK INTERFACE CARD
CCM CPU BOARD PEGAsys PANEL
CCM CPU BOARD PEGAsys PANEL
Note A: Attach the shields on the 'N' side of the network line to the grounding screw on the CCM. Note B: The shields on the 'I' side of the network line are to be cut short and left floating.
Figure J-4. Network Wiring J-5 MAINTENANCE AND/OR REPLACEMENT
No maintenance is required. In the event of failure, the module should be returned to the factory for repair or replacement. J-6 PARTS LIST
The NIC Installation Kit (P/N 76-100036-500) consists of the following:

D escrip tio n Network Interface Card (NIC) Snap-in Nylon Standoff, -in. 8-32 Theadless Brass Standoff, Nickel plated 8-32 x 1-in. Screw with Washer Installation Sheet P art N u mb er 74-200036-500 06-118142-001 06-118143-001
Many electronic components are subject to damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD). These components are not to be removed from their protective wrappings until they are to be installed in their respective equipment locations, and then only by personnel connected to earth ground. Note: For proper network configuration it is necessary to use Version 7.X (or later) of PCS. For complete information on this aspect of installation, see the PEGAsys Configuration Software user's manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015). As of this date, Version 8.X (or later) of PCS is required for proper configuration. Required Tools
J-7.2
06-250116-030 06-235848-001
Some or all of the following tools will be required to perform removal and installation. Small flat-blade screwdriver. 6" flat-blade screwdriver. No. 2 cross-head screwdriver. Wire striper. Small needle nose pliers. Ground strap (wrist strap) for ESD protection. IC chip extraction tool. Central Control Module
J-7
INSTALLATION
The NIC is installed as a daughter board to the CCM board. After this is accomplished, the panels are wired together using twisted, unshielded-pair cable, AWG-18 or heavier. For full Style-7 operation, two unshielded, twisted pair cables must connect each pair of panels, as shown in Figure J-4. Single-channel operation (using only one twisted pair cable between NICs) is possible and provides Style 4 operation. With single-channel operation, an open circuit on any network wire will effectively break the network into two separate peer-to-peer networks, both functional and both reporting troubles.
J-7.3
The PEGAsys panel will be delivered with a separate network interface card; some existing panels can be retrofitted with a network interface card. Following are instructions both for replacement of complete CCM modules, and for installing a NIC in an existing CCM module. The CCM module consists of both the CPU panel and its attached LCD display and keypad assembly.
76-100016-001
J-5
July 2003
PEGAsys
J-7.4 Removing and Replacing a Complete CCM Module 10. Carefully plug in the membrane keypad and attach the four screws. Make sure pins and receptacle are properly aligned. 11. Attach network wiring as previously described. 12. Apply power, reinstall programming and configure the network using PCS. Refer to Figure J-2.
20-PIN RECEPTACLE FOR NIC
The old CCM module can be removed as a whole and replaced with a new module. The following provides the procedure for removing and replacing a complete CCM module. 1. Ensure that all programming is saved using PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS). For the proper procedure, see the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015). 2. Ensure that the power supply EPROM is of a version compatible with PEGAsys networking. 3. Put on a properly grounded ESD-protective wrist strap. 4. Remove power from the control unit; make sure that the chassis remains grounded. 5. Disconnect cables from the RS-485 port, the RX/TX port, and the PC port. Make note of each wire and cable connection for use during reassembly 6. Remove the remaining wiring from CCM. 7. Remove the six mounting screws while holding the CCM assembly in place. 8. Remove CCM assembly from cabinet. 9. Remove new CCM assembly from packing and inspect for physical damage. If undamaged, proceed to Step 10. 10. Install new CCM in the reverse order of removal, making sure that each wire and cable is properly reconnected. 11. Apply power, reinstall programming and configure the network using PCS. Refer to Figure J-2. J-7.5 Installing an NIC in an existing CCM Module 1. Ensure that all programming is saved using PCS software. 2. Put on a properly grounded ESD-protective wrist strap. 3. Remove power from panel but be sure the chassis remains grounded. 4. Remove four nylon screws holding membrane keypad and remove membrane by pulling it straight out of its connector. 5. Remove the six threaded spacers that secure the display electronics board and lift board out. Do not disconnect boardlet it hang down. Data and power lines will remain connected. 6. Insert the three plastic standoffs that were included with the NIC into the holes shown in Figure J-5. 7. Carefully plug the NIC into the 20-pin receptacle and onto the plastic standoffs. 8. Secure upper right corner of NIC with long screw and spacer. Spacer will separate NIC and the CCM board and screw will go through to the panel. 9. Replace the display electronics board and reattach the six threaded spacers.
LONG SCREW AND SPACER THROUGH HERE INSERT PLASTIC STANDOFFS HERE
DISPLAY PORT RS-485 PORT RX/TX PORT P.C. PORT

RX/TX PORT RS-485 PORT
PRINT PORT
DISP PORT
PRINT PORT
PC PORT
Figure J-5. CCM Board Showing NIC Attachment Points J-7.6 Replacing Firmware Chips
Refer to the instructions in the applicable PEGAsys Firmware Upgrade Kit. All networked control units must have the same version of CCM Firmware. J-8 POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
The NIC is powered by the panel to which it is attached via the CCM board. No other power connections are required. J-9 TESTING
Testing is a function of the PEGAsys system in which the NIC is installed. No local test functions exist. For more information on testing the NIC and the network, see the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) User's Manual. J-10 SPECIFICATIONS Input Voltage Supervisory Current Alarm Current 24 Vdc 50 mA maximum 50 mA maximum
July 2003
J-6
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
APPENDIX K ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL/SOUNDER MODULE

K-1 INTRODUCTION Addressing and registration into the PEGAsys system is described in Paragraph 2-8 (and sub-paragraphs) of this manual. Registration of the module at the PEGAsys panel is mandatory to ensure proper operation. K-3 OPERATION
The SmartOne Addressable Signal/Sounder Module (ASM) is an intelligent field device that contains its own microprocessor, 4K of memory and all necessary electronics to provide standard notification or audio output. Connection is via the SmartOne compatible control panels power/communication line. This component is a UL Listed field device. The ASM can be individually field programmed via hardware to support notification appliances and NFPA Class B, Style Y or Class A, Style Z operation. See Figure K-2 for audio/ auxiliary notification appliance switch and jumper selections, and NFPA operation Class A and Class B terminal selections. Note: The ASM is not intended to be used as a releasing device and is not compatible with solenoids.
Once installed and configured, the ASM requires little or no maintenance. The module's 24 Vdc or 25/70 Vac modes can be changed from the factory defaults using switch S1 and jumper P1 (see Figure K-1). K-4 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
For installation details and complete electrical and mechanical specifications, see the ASM Installation Data Sheet (P/N 06-235717-001).
The SmartOne Addressable Signal/Sounder Module (ASM) provides a fully supervised remote-output circuit for connection to either 24 Vdc audible/visual notification signaling devices or 25/70.7 V RMS speakers. The module provides continuous internal supervision of: Alarm contact position. Connections to loop voltage and communications. Internal power supply. Auxiliary power supply connections and status. Memory status.
PC LINE
TM

+ -
+ -
UL
R
The output circuit is monitored by reverse polarity and will not actuate into a short. If the circuit has a ground fault, open, short or a relay contact failure, the device will transmit a specific trouble status. A status LED is mounted on the unit and indicates the output circuit status by a two second (active) or nine second (normal) flash interval. A trouble condition inhibits the status LED completely. K-5 MAINTENANCE OR REPLACEMENT
FM
APPROVED
Figure K-1. ASM Front Panel K-2 ADDRESSING AND REGISTRATION The ASM is shipped from the factory as an assembled component, and is not field serviceable. Little or no maintenance is required. Testing is accomplished through the testing capabilities of the PEGAsys panel. See Chapter 5, Troubleshooting and Corrective Maintenance, for particulars. In the event of a failure, the module should be replaced. For replacement, follow the instructions in the ASM Installation data sheet.
As with any SmartOne loop device, addressing is done via the Kidde hand-held programmer (P/N 74-200013-001) or the PEGAsys control panel menu/keypad, as described in Chapter 2 of this manual. Set the ASM for audio mode, install a 47K resistor on the output circuit, and install a 4.7K resistor on the trouble circuit when addressing with the handheld programmer. Module-programmable parameters include owners-location message, non-silenceable (waterflow), walk test, drill mode and silence. The programming process is described in PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015).
76-100016-001 K-1
January 2002
PEGAsys
K-6 PARTS LIST If the auxiliary notification appliance power source is not power limited, the output circuit, auxiliary input circuit and the trouble circuit are non-power limited. Otherwise, all three circuits are power limited. Supervision of audio to ASM must be provided by the audio equipment. Power limited or non-power limited amplifier outputs are available. K-7.2 Output Circuit Characteristics
The following parts are required for installation and operation. All are supplied with the ASM. K-7 Addressable Signal/Sounder Module: P/N 70-200200-001 Front Cover Plate: P/N 06235714-001 End-of-Line (EOL) Resistor, 4.7 K Ohms, 1/2 W: P/N 06-250166-452 End-of-Line (EOL) Resistor, 47 K Ohms, 1/2 W: P/N 06-250166-596 Installation Data Sheet: P/N 06-235717-001 INSTALLATION
Output Circuit Rating 2.0 A max. @ 30.0 Vdc 20.0 W @ 70.7 V RMS 20.0 W @ 25.0 V RMS Maximum Line Resistances (with 12 AWG wire)
L o ad (a m p s ) 0.22 0.55 1.00 1.50 2.00 R esistan ce (o h m s ) 20.0 8.0 4.0 2.7 2.0 L e n g th (fe e t)* 12.0k 5.0k 2.5k 0.6k 1.2k
Refer to Figure K-2 and to the ASM Installation Instruction Data Sheet. K-7.1 Installation Notes
The ASM single printed circuit board is intended for indoor use and can be mounted in a North American 4-11/16" electrical box, or 4-inch square 2-1/8-inch deep box. The module terminal block will accept #12, #14, #16 and #18 AWG wire (4.0 mm2, 2.5 mm2, 1.5 mm2 and 1.0 mm2 respectively). Size #18 AWG is the minimum requirement. The use of solid wire and an extension ring is recommended. Strip -inch from the ends of all wires that connect to the terminal block of the module.
! CAUTION
*Note: Consider total line lengths from module to field and return.
Exposing more than -inch of wire may cause a ground fault. Exposing less than -inch of wire may result in a faulty connection.
1/4 (6.4mm) NTS

Figure K-2. -Inch Strip Refer to the National Electrical Code for proper box specifications. ASM volume is 8.94 cubic-inches. Refer to the RX/TX specifications in the chapters on Operation and Functional Description for addressable-loop wiring specifications. Power/Communication (PC) line wiring is power limited and supervised. For power-limited circuits, use Type FPL, FPLR or FPLP cable per Article 760 of the National Electrical Code (NEC). The note located on the module's product label (ALL OTHERS-POWER LIMITED) must be removed if the module is connected to a non-power limited supply source.
January 2002
K-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
PC LINE IN
FOR 24VDC MODE SET P1 JUMPER FROM 2-3 AND SWITCH S1 1 2 3 ON ON OFF FOR AUDIO MODE SET P1 JUMPER FROM 1-2 AND SWITCH S1 1 2 3 OFF OFF ON VERIFY SWITCH AND JUMPER SETTINGS AND TEST PER NFPA 72
PC LINE OUT SEE NOTE 3

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721 U.S.A. CAT. NO. 70-200200-001 INSTRUCTIONS P/N 06-235717-001 PC LINE TERMINALS - POWER LMTD. ALL OTHERS - POWER LIMITED DEVICE ADDRESS # _ _ _ _
PC LINE
ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL/SOUNDER MODULE

AUX. IN
+ - + -
TROUBLE CKT.
OUTPUT CKT.
+ - - +
LISTED COMPATIBLE 24VDC OR 25/70.7VAC NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
SEE NOTE 6
SUPPLY OUT
LISTED 47K, 1/2W EOL RESISTOR
+ -
TROUBLE CONTACT OPEN FOR NORMAL STATUS
EXAMPLE OF STYLE Z (CLASS A) SHOWING THE ONLY ALLOWABLE EOL RESISTOR POSITION.
+ REGULATED SUPPLY OR 25/70.7 VAC AUDIO AMPLIFIER LISTED FOR FIRE PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS
LISTED 4.7K, 1/2W EOL RESISTOR
OUTPUT CKT.
+ - - +
SEE NOTE 4
LISTED 47K, 1/2W EOL RESISTOR
EXAMPLE OF STYLE Y (CLASS B) SHOWING THE ONLY ALLOWABLE EOL RESISTOR POSITION.
NOTES: 1. Terminal connection supports wiring from #18 AWG (1.0 mm2) to #12 AWG (4.0 mm2). Wires determine electrical box depth. 2. Refer to Control Panel Manual for addressable loop wiring specification. 3. PC Line wiring is power limited and supervised. 4. If auxiliary power source is non-power limited, the output circuit, auxiliary input circuit and the trouble circuit are nonpower limited. Otherwise, all three circuits are power limited. 5. All circuits are supervised. 6. Supervision of audio to ASM must be provided by the audio equipment. Figure K-3. Installation Wiring Diagram
76-100016-001 K-3 January 2002
PEGAsys
January 2002
K-4
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
APPENDIX L REMOTE DISPLAY CONTROL MODULE AND REMOTE DISPLAY MODULE

L-1 INTRODUCTION L-2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This manual contains the information necessary to support the PEGAsys Remote Display Control Module (RDCM) (Figure L-1), P/N 76-300000-502, and Remote Display Module (RDM) (Figure L-2), P/N 76-300000-501. Both modules function as remote addressable adjuncts to the PEGAsys and mimic the main control panels LCD and LED front displays. Additionally, the RDCM contains system control switches and a tactile response numeric keypad. These controls match the PEGAsys layout. The RDM does not permit operation of the control features (operation is read only). The RDCM is key and password secured with the password needed being the one used on the associated PEGAsys panel.
The RDCM and RDM communicate with the PEGAsys via an RS-485 interface (one pair #18 AWG, twisted/unshielded wire) in a multi-drop configuration capable of supporting up to fifteen (15) RDCM display/control and sixteen (16) RDM display only modules. The installation can be in any combination of RDCM/RDM modules so long as the maximum quantity for each module is not exceeded. The RDCM, in addition to emulation of the PEGAsys LEDs and LCD display, provides remote access to the system and, if programmed, the PEGAsys network panel(s) and menu options via this emulation of the PEGAsys front panel function and numeric keys. Remote, non-resetable power is required and can be provided by the control panel PSU or a separate UL Listed supply for fire alarm application. In each instance, remote power is supervised by the RDCM and RDM with failure displayed locally and at the control panel. The units also contain a buzzer with sequencing that follows the buzzer contained in the control panel. Either the PEGAsys control panel or one RDCM can be programmed as the master unit to control the system under alarm or fault conditions. Operation of an alternate (nonmaster) unit will grant that module exclusive control over the system for 30 seconds. Under these conditions, attempts to input from another module will prompt a lockout display message on the module attempting the interrupt. This acts to prevent conflicting inputs. Under all circumstances, the master will be granted immediate system control. L-2.1 Operator Interface
SILENCE
SCROLL
Figure L-1. RDCM Front Panel
SYSTEM TROUBLE SUPERVISORY SILENCE SCROLL
All operator interfaces are contained in the front panel assembly. Operator inputs are passed to the PEGAsys for processing. The RDCM operator-interface function keys are:
Figure L-2. RDM Front Panel Module installers must be fully factory trained in all aspects of the PEGAsys system. Additional supporting documentation is also contained in this manual and in the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) manuals, P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015.
Note:
Acknowledge: Acknowledge alarms/troubles and silence all local buzzers. Silence: Silence signal/audibles after Acknowledge. Reset: Reset latched alarm conditions. Scroll: Review active alarms/troubles. Drill operation is available through the PEGAsys menu.
76-100016-001
L-1
July 2003
PEGAsys
The RDCM operator interface needed to enter the password and access the PEGAsys menu is provided via the alphanumeric keypad: Note: 09: Used to enter digits to access PEGAsys menus. Backspace: Used to exit menu and correct entries. Enter: Used when selecting from PEGAsys menus. Operation of above keys will be hereinafter described. L-2.2 Interconnection
The RDCM and RDM operate on a shared RS-485 bus which supports wire runs of up to 4000 ft. from the PEGAsys control panel. The primary RS-485 bus from the PEGAsys will support up to fifteen (15) RDCMs and sixteen (16) RDMs in any combination not exceeding the maximum for each module. L-2.3 Addressing
The RDCM and RDM operator interface status LEDs for monitoring the PEGAsys and remote modules are: Alarm: Indicates an alarm condition. Trouble: Indicates a trouble condition. Silence: Indicates PEGAsys signal/audibles have been silenced after Acknowledge. Supervisory: Indicates a supervisory condition. Power-on: Indicates the system is receiving AC power. Pre-alarm: Indicates a smoke or thermal detector is in pre-alarm condition. CPU fail: Mounted on main PCB and available to the installer only. Indicates RDCM/RDM processor has failed to initialize.
Address selection is via setting of the 16-way, 4-bit hexadecimal coded rotary switch, SW1, mounted on the printed circuit board. See Figure L-4. Table L-1. Address Switch Settings
S w itch S ettin g 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 R D M/R D C M Ad d ress RDM or RDCM 01 RDM or RDCM 02 RDM or RDCM 03 RDM or RDCM 04 RDM or RDCM 05 RDM or RDCM 06 RDM or RDCM 07 RDM or RDCM 08 S w itch S ettin g 9 A B C D E F 0 R D M/R D C M Ad d ress RDM or RDCM 09 RDM or RDCM 10 RDM or RDCM 11 RDM or RDCM 12 RDM or RDCM 13 RDM or RDCM 14 RDM or RDCM 15 RDM 16
LED colors used to represent indications are: Red: Alarm. Green: Power-on. Yellow: CPU failure, trouble, silence, supervisory and pre-alarm. L-3
OPERATION
The RDM functions as read only. Therefore, it has a scroll key, but does not provide the other function keys nor an operable keypad.
Before proceeding with operations, become totally familiar with PEGAsys Fire Alarm/Suppression Control System manual, especially the sections on Active Alarm Mode, Active Supervisory Mode and Active Trouble Mode. Be sure to note differences between latching and non-latching Active Alarm Modes. For RX/TX loop input devices: To set either latching or non-latching, refer to the PCS Operations chapter in the PEGAsys Configuration Software manual.
PEGAsys AUX. 24V TB1 PINS + 5 6 TB1 PINS 1 2 7 8
TWISTED UNSHIELDED CABLE PINS 3 & 4 ARE TIED TOGETHER WHEN USING THE PANELS POWER SUPPLY 3 OUT 4 6 5 TB1 PINS PIN 1 OF TB1 IS AT TOP OF CONNECTOR NOTES: 1. ALL CIRCUITS ARE SUPERVISED AND POWER LIMITED. 2. REMOVE JUMPER W2 FROM DCM AND ALL INTERMEDIATE REMOTE DISPLAYS. INSTALL W2 ON LAST REMOTE DISPLAY ONLY. 3. IF SHIELDED CABLE, CONNECT SHIELD TO CHASSIS/EARTH GROUND. 5 6 1 2 4 TB1 PINS UP TO 31 REMOTE DEVICES
POWER SUPPLY
RDCM/RDM ASSEMBLY IN
DCM ASSEMBLY
7 8
RDCM/RDM ASSEMBLY IN 3
AUX. SUPPLY (IF REQ'D.) + - 24V TO TROUBLE CONTACTS CLOSED = NORMAL OPERATION
Figure L-3. Interconnection of PEGAsys Panel, RDM, RDCM(s)

July 2003 L-2 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
The following example is for latching alarm mode (for these examples, assume the device to be manual release, address 1004). In Normal Standby Mode, the display will show: SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL 10:00AM 06-08-99 PEGASYS In practice, the actual local time and date will be shown. When a RX/TX loop device goes into active alarm, the display will show: 1004 ALARM ON - MANUAL RELEASE Default or user text L-3.1 Switch Functions Again, in the case of multiple alarms (either On or Off), each event must be acknowledged separately. In the case of multiple troubles, actuation of the acknowledge input may be separate or programmed to global acknowledge. A maximum of thirty (30) trouble messages can be acknowledged at any one time. For non-latching sequence, each ALARM OFF will display and must be acknowledged. 1004 ALARM OFF - MANUAL RELEASE Default or user text In the event of loss of communications between the RDCM and the PEGAsys on the RS-485 bus, the local buzzer will sound and the trouble LED will light. L-3.1.2 SILENCE
The switch functions are listed in sequence of use: L-3.1.1 ACKNOWLEDGE
All ALARM ON, ALARM OFF, TROUBLE ON/OFF or SUPERVISORY ON/OFF messages must be acknowledged by operation of this switch. Multiple alarms must be individually acknowledged, all other multiple inputs will default to individual acknowledge, but may be programmed to global acknowledge by accessing the SET" menu from the PEGAsys or any RDCM. The RDCM will pass the acknowledge input to the PEGAsys causing its LED to go from a pulsing to a steady mode, and the buzzer to silence. The PEGAsys sends a global command to silence all remote RDCM/RDM buzzers. The PEGAsys sends out a global lockout command to all other RDCMs. This gives the calling device exclusive control over the system for 30 seconds. Under these conditions, attempts to input from another module will prompt a lockout display message (see Paragraph L-3.1.2) on the module attempting the interrupt to prevent conflicting inputs. Under all circumstances, the module (or control panel) programmed as the system master will be granted immediate system control. The display at the calling device will then show: 1004 ALARM ON ACK - MANUAL RELEASE Default or user text (The default or user text is that which is entered at the associated PEGAsys panel. This message cannot be changed from the RDCM.) The display will then show how many active alarms are still present in the system (if any), and subsequently display how many active supervisory or trouble conditions are still present in the system (if any). For example: 001 ACTIVE ALARMS REMAINING
When all alarm and trouble conditions have been acknowledged, operation of the silence switch will have the following results: The RDCM will pass the silence input to the PEGAsys causing all outputs programmed for silence to de-energize. The PEGAsys sends out a global lockout command to all other RDCM(s). This gives the calling device exclusive control over the system for 30 seconds. For these examples, assume RDCM address 02. If another (non-master) module attempts an interrupt, the following lockout message will display for 5 seconds: RDCM 02 IN CONTROL Note: RDCM 02 is the default. This message can be customized in PCS. Please refer to the PEGAsys Configuration Software manual.
After the 30 second control period, any other module can provide system inputs (unless a module programmed as system master assumes control). L-3.1.3 RESET
After all active alarms and troubles have been cleared, input devices programmed to the latching sequence will show: XXX ALARMS ACTIVE Input devices programmed to the non-latching sequence will show: NO ACTIVE ALARM REMAINS Operation of the reset switch will have the following results: The RDCM will pass the reset input to the PEGAsys, causing all conditions programmed to cancel on reset to de-energize.
76-100016-001
L-3
July 2003
PEGAsys
The PEGAsys sends out a global lockout command to all other RDCMs. This gives the calling device exclusive control over the system for 30 seconds and displays the following message: SYSTEM RESET If there are no further key entries at the calling device (address 02), and no further system events are detected, all modules and the PEGAsys will display the system default message: SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL 10:00AM 03-08-99 PEGASYS In practice, the actual local time and date will be shown. In the event of an RDCM's microprocessor going into fault condition, actuation of hardware switch S3 located behind the display membrane will cause a hardware reset of the microprocessor. L-3.1.4 SCROLL L-3.3 If the password entry is incorrect, the display will become: PASSWORD ENTRY FAILED The RDCM will request another password entry request, and, if correct, the PEGAsys will send the 30 second global lockout command to all other RDCMs. The calling device (address 02) will then have access to the PEGAsys menu. Please refer to this manual for menu operating instructions. If during the password entry sequence any key other than the numeric key (except Backspace) is pressed before the Enter key, the PEGAsys will update the RDCM with the default display. L-3.2 LED Status Display
The front panel display LEDs will operate in three modes: Off: No system activity. On Continuously: Acknowledged alarm, supervisory or trouble. Pulsing: 1 second on, 1 second off; active alarm, supervisory or trouble. LCD Display
When the Scroll key is pressed during any active system event, the following will result: The PEGAsys sends out a global lockout command to all other RDCM(s). Calling device (address 02) will then have exclusive control over the system as described in reset above. Note: The RDM scroll key does not provide the global lockout command.
With no active events in the system, all RDCM/RDMs will display the default message: SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL 10:00am 03-08-99 PEGASYS PEGASYS is the default message. This can be customized by PCS. Please refer to the PEGAsys Configuration Software manual. L-3.4 Password Data Structure
The PEGAsys, RDCMs and RDMs will then be updated by the next event in the buffer. When a Scroll key is actuated at any RDCM, RDM or the PEGAsys, the resulting scroll display is sent globally to the system. LED Test Feature: With no active inputs, press and hold the scroll key for 2 seconds. All LEDs will light for 5 seconds. System Information Entry Keys: To enter passwords and gain access the PEGAsys menu functions, the relevant keys are: Numeric 0-9: Enters password and system function information. Enter: Enter information into the system menu. Backspace: Exit system menu or correct wrong entries.
Two system levels are available from the RDCM. These are: Level 1 (User Level) and Level 2 (Installer Level). Refer to the Menu Function and Menu Structure sections of the PEGAsys Fire Alarm/Suppression Control System manual for descriptions of the capabilities available through these levels. Each PEGAsys is shipped from the factory with default passwords for Level 1 of 987 and Level 2 of 1865. Default passwords can be customized in the Level 2 Set Menu Function. Changing passwords for the system can be accomplished from any RDCM or directly from the PEGAsys. L-3.5 RDCM/RDM Local Trouble Conditions
To enter the password, press the 0 key. The RDCM opens the password entry menu and displays: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD Each key entry will then display the # character: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD ####
The RDCM/RDM is supervised for failure of the power supply and failure to communicate with the PEGAsys during the polling routine. The power failure display is:
July 2003
L-4
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
REMOTE PSU FAULT ON RDCM XX If no communication is detected with the PEGAsys during the polling routine and the PSU is active, a local trouble message will be displayed on the RDCM/RDM. NO COMMUNICATION WITH MAIN PANEL L-4 SPECIFICATIONS Table L-1. RDCM/RDM Specifications
E L E C T R IC AL In p u t vo ltag e S u p erviso ry cu rren t Alarm cu rren t R S -485 n etw o rk 24 Vdc nomi nal 64 mA nomi nal 85 mA nomi nal Up to 4000 ft. from PEGAsys control panel usi ng #18 AWG twi sted/unshelded wi re 15 RDCMs/16 RDMs i n any combi nati on, not exceedi ng maxi mum for each module NFPA Style 4, Class "B" ME C H AN IC AL D imen sio n s Weig h t 12.05" W X 7.156" H 4 lbs, 13 oz E N V IR ON ME N TAL Op eratin g temp eratu re Op eratin g h u mid ity 32oF (0oC)120oF (49oC) 85% non-condensi ng
Maximu m R D C M/R D Ms
Wirin g style
L-5
INSTALLATION
See Figure L-4.
76-100016-001
L-5
July 2003
PEGAsys
.409 MOUNTING FOR #10 (.190 DIA.) SCREWS 12.000 5.875 9.500
SW1 ADDRESS 1 TO 16 (F) 1/2" & 3/4" COMBINATION KNOCKOUTS (2) LOCATED ON TOP SURFACE (1) LOCATED ON EACH SIDE.
1.250
W1 LED BACKLIGHT ENABLE VR1 LED BACKLIGHT ADJUST VR2 LCD CONTRAST ADJUST
PO
WE
SU
Y PL
IS TW
TE
SH
IEL
ED
CA
BL
O ET
A CH
SS
IS
H RT /EA
GR
OU
ND
DS1 SW3
HARDWARE FOR GND. CONNECTION
CONNECTOR
UL
R
FM VED O PR AP
INSTRUCTION LABEL
SE R. NO .
Figure L-4. Installation of RDM or RDCM
July 2003
L-6
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
APPENDIX M ADDRESSABLE ALARMLINE MODULE

M-1 INTRODUCTION M-3 OPERATION
The Addressable AlarmLineTM Module (AAM) permits an AlarmLine sensor cable to be directly interfaced to the PEGAsys control panel. This interface will allow for pre-alarm, alarm and trouble conditions to be transmitted to the control panel via the RX/TX (Receive/Transmit) loop. The AAM monitors the resistance of the sensor cable and generates a prealarm (if enabled), alarm or overheat output (if enabled) when the resistance drops below the programmed threshold. The module also supervises the AlarmLine cable for opens and shorts, which will generate a fault condition. All of the prealarm, alarm, overheat and trouble conditions will be displayed on the Central Control Module (CCM) of the PEGAsys panel. Up to 255 AAM modules can be connected to a single RX/TX module. The use of multiple AAMs allows for flexibility in zoning larger installations for location of alarm and zone output control; the control panel acts as a central display and control interface. For complete information, please refer to the AlarmLine Addressable Linear Heat Detector Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual (P/N 73.04).
A change in temperature produces a change in resistance between the loops within the sensor cable (as the temperature increases, resistance decreases exponentially). This change is continuously monitored by the AAM, which generates an alarm or pre-alarm signal at a predetermined level corresponding to the temperature set point. The temperature at which the system will alarm is determined by selecting one of 16 configuration settings using the control panels configuration software or CCM menu options. The appropriate configuration setting for a given set point is established by the use of a nomogram incorporating two known factors: Maximum ambient temperature of the alarm zone Length of the sensor cable
The integrating (averaging) effect of the sensor cable allows it to detect localized hot spot or a low level temperature increase over the entire length. For more detailed information, please refer to the AlarmLine Addressable Linear Heat Detector Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual. M-4 MAINTENANCE OR REPLACEMENT
TM
The AAM is shipped from the factory as an assembled component and is not field serviceable. Little or no maintenance is required. Refer to Chapters 4 and 5 of this manual and to the AlarmLine Addressable Linear Heat Detector Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual for further information on maintenance and testing of field devices connected to the PEGAsys panel RX/TX loop. Figure M-1. Addressable AlarmLine Module Front Panel M-2 ADDRESSING AND REGISTERING M-5 PARTS LIST
Refer to Chapter 9 of the AlarmLine Addressable Linear Heat Detector Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual. M-6 INSTALLATION
Each AAM is shipped from the factory with the default address of 000. This permits connection to the Power Communication (PC) line without interfering with devices already on the loop. Only one device with this default address should be connected to the PC line at a time. Alternately, the AAM address can be preset with a hand-held programmer (P/N 74-200013-001) after which the module can be connected to the PC line. If a hand-held programmer is not available, the address can be changed directly at the CCM using the procedure outlined in Chapter 2 of this manual.
76-100016-001 M-1
Refer to Paragraph 3-2 of the AlarmLine Addressable Linear Heat Detector Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual.
July 2003
PEGAsys
M-7 TESTING
Refer to Chapter 7 of the AlarmLine Addressable Linear Heat Detector Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual.
July 2003
M-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
APPENDIX N NETWORKABLE CENTRAL CONTROL MODULE (NCCM)

N-1 INTRODUCTION Configuration Software (PCS) is used to program the system. A multi-level password scheme protects the system from unauthorized access. The real-time clock provides the NCCM with the ability to display the current time and date on the system LCD and provides basic information for real-time operations. Internal diagnostics enhance the troubleshooting ability of the system. Examples include: microprocessor failure, memory failure, RS-232 port troubles, etc. Network diagnostics are controlled separately and report to appropriate panels. The two individually programmable signal output circuits (MP1 and MP2) provided are used primarily for signaling devices (horns, bells, strobes) and deliver up to 2.0 Amps of 24 Vdc power. Optionally, the MP1 output can be programmed for releasing applications using solenoid-actuated suppression equipment (agent and sprinkler). Two individually programmable relay outputs (MP3 and MP4) are provided on the NCCM for controlling building functions during alarm occurrences. Relays are Form C, 1 Amp @ 30 Vdc rated. All four NCCM outputs can be programmed via EOC to activate from either panel or, if provided, network inputs. One non-programmable trouble relay is supplied which is normally powered (24 Vdc) and will transfer on any system (or, if provided, network) trouble, supervisory, pre-alarm and complete power-off condition. Relay is Form C, rated 1 Amp @ 30 Vdc. Refer to Appendix I for mechanical installation details. An event history buffer is provided on the NCCM which will store 1024 entries for single-loop and 6100 entries for multiloop system events information. Network option does not alter event limits, however, network events are recorded. The system menu permits operator retrieval of recorded events. The PCS program provides the ability to download, store and print all or a portion of the event history buffer. The NCCM common display module assembly (which is physically and electronically attached to the main processor module) provides the system with the operator interface and, if provided, network interface for control switches, system status LEDs, system trouble/alarm buzzer, an 80 character (2 x 40) LCD display and an integral numeric keypad. The keypad is used for entering the security password and navigating through the user menus. The system buzzer provides two distinct signaling patterns for audible warning of system alarms and troubles.
The Networkable Central Control Module (NCCM), shown in Figure N-1, is the heart of the PEGAsys system and is composed of two printed circuit board assemblies: the display control module (DCM) and the CCM printed circuit board. The NCCM is available in two versions: P/N 76100008-501/-701 for single-loop systems and P/N 76100008-600/-800 for multi-loop systems.
SILENCE
SCROLL
Figure N-1. Networkable Central Control Module Front Panel The NCCM is essentially identical to the CCM described earlier in this manual, with the same capabilities. However, the CCM printed circuit board has been designed to receive the optional Network Interface Card (see the physical description and menu options in Appendix J of this manual), enabling networked operation. Additionally, the display control module adjunct to the main processor module provides connection to the Remote Display Control Module (RDCM) and Remote Display Module (RDM) described in Appendix L of this manual. N-2 CONFIGURATION/FUNCTION
The CCM PCB controls the operation and supervision of all the system modules and software within the PEGAsys system. It receives loop device data from the RX/TX module, and system data from the optional NIC and/or RDCM. It processes the data based on pre-programmed instructions and transmits output commands to the output modules, optional NIC and/or RDCM or RDM modules, loop output devices, and the adjunct display control module. The CCM PCB contains the system CPU, real-time clock, watchdog timer and two serial RS-232 ports: a programming input/output (PC) port and a printer output port. These ports accept 6-wire RJ-12 modular connectors. PEGAsys
76-100016-001
N-1
July 2003
PEGAsys
July 2003
N-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
APPENDIX O CENTRAL STATION OPERATION

O-1 CENTRAL STATION OPERATION
For central station operation, the PEGAsys control panel must be configured for central station use through PCS menu (Network Settings). A Silent Knight DACTModel 5104must be wired to the PEGAsys control panel, as shown in Figure O-1. See the Model 5104 installation manual for information regarding connection of the DACT to the telephone line for alarm and trouble transmission(s).
Silent Knight DACT Model 5104 PCB
NO NC C Volt Free Relay 2
NO NC C Fault Relay
PegaSYS CCM PCB
4.7k 8 9 4.7k 10 11 12 Zone 4 Trouble Zone 3 Alarm
18 17 16 15 14 13
Figure O-1. Wiring for DACT
76-100016-001
O-1
July 2003
PEGAsys
July 2003
O-2
76-100016-001
TECHNICAL MANUAL USER FEEDBACK FORM
(Use this report to indicate deficiencies, user remarks and recommendations relating to the publication. Fold on dotted line, tape and mail to KIDDE-FENWAL, Inc., 400 Main Street, Ashland, MA 01721, Attn. Documentation Manager or FAX to 508-881-8920)
DATE: 1. PART NUMBER 2. VOLUME NO. 3. TITLE (NOMENCLATURE)
4. CHANGE NO. OR REV. DATE
5. SYSTEM/EQUIPMENT
6. PRIORITY OF COMMENT
7. USER EVALUATION MANUAL IS: 8. PROBLEM EXCELLENT QUESTION GOOD FAIR POOR COMMENT: (check one) COMPLETE INCOMPLETE
SUGGESTION
9. RECOMMENDED CHANGE TO PUBLICATION PAGE NO. PARAGRAPH LINE FIGURE NO. NO. NO. TABLE NO. RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON (Use Blank Continuation Sheets as Required)
10. ORIGINATOR
11. COMPANY NAME
12. ADDRESS
13. KIDDE-FENWAL USE ONLY a. Received b. Action Necessity c. Priority d. Comments
220423
FOLD
Place Stamp Here
KIDDE-FENWAL, Inc. 400 Main Street Ashland, MA 01721 Attn. Documentation Manager
FOLD
220423
LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT
Kidde-Fenwal, Inc. represents that this product is free from defects in material and workmanship, and it will repair or replace any product or part thereof which proves to be defective in workmanship or material for a period of twelve (12) months from the date of purchase but not to exceed eighteen (18) months after shipment by Kidde-Fenwal Inc. For a full description of Kidde-Fenwals LIMITED WARRANTY, which, among other things, EXCLUDES warranties of MERCHANTABILITY and FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE and liability for CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, please read the entire LIMITED WARRANTY on the Kidde-Fenwal Quotation, Acceptance of Order and/or Original Invoice which will become part of your sales agreement. Please contact Kidde-Fenwal directly for a return material authorization (RMA) number before returning material to the factory at Ashland, Massachusetts, shipment prepaid. Kidde-Fenwal will repair or replace and ship prepaid.
AlarmLine, PEGAsys and ORION are trademarks of Kidde-Fenwal, Inc. Kidde, HSSD and SmartOne are registered trademarks of Kidde-Fenwal, Inc. All other trademarks are property of their respective owners.
These instructions do not purport to cover all the details or variations in the equipment described, nor do they provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation and maintenance. All specifications subject to change without notice. Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchasers purposes, the matter should be referred to KIDDE-FENWAL INC., Ashland, Masssachusetts
76-100016-001
Rev. BD
2003 Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.
Printed in USA

Kidde Pegasys 76-100016-001

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Kidde Pegasys 76-100016-001

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

July 2003 P/N 76-100016-001

Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual

July 2003 P/N 76-100016-001

Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

PEGAsys Multi-Loop System (P/N 76-100000-600)

TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont.)

TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont.)

TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont.)

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (cont.)

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

Alarm Notification Appliances

SUPPRESSION SYSTEM ABORT

Addressable Suppression System Abort Device

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

AC POWER ALARM PRE-ALARM

SYSTEM TROUBLE SUPERVISORY SILENCE

SYSTEM ACKNOWLEDGE SYSTEM RESET

Figure 1-3. Display Module Assembly 1-2.3 Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX)

SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY

AC POWER ALARM PRE-ALARM

SYSTEM TROUBLE SUPERVISORY SILENCE

SYSTEM ACKNOWLEDGE SYSTEM RESET

Display Reset Switch

Display Trouble LED

Loop Isolator for Style 7

Figure 1-2. Central Control Module (CCM)

Figure 1-4. Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX)

No. of Output Modules 17 16 15 14 13 12 1

Figure 1-5. Power Supply/Charger Assembly 1-2.5 Basic Motherboard

COM TBL COM ALM SIG GND 485A 485B

Figure 1-7. Multi-Loop Motherboard 1-2.7 Output Modules

Figure 1-6. Basic Motherboard 1-2.6 Multi-Loop Motherboard

Figure 1-8. Signal Output Module 1-2.7.2 RELAY OUTPUT MODULE

Figure 1-10. Agent Release Output Module 1-2.7.4 CITY-TIE MODULE

Figure 1-11. City Tie Module

Figure 1-9. Relay Output Module

16 15 LK13 14 13 12 LK11 11 10 9 LK9 8 7 LK7 6 5 4 LK5 3 2 LK3 1

32 31 30 LK28 29 28 27 LK26 26 25 LK24 24 23 22 LK22 21 20 LK20 19 18 17

System Status Display

AC POWER ALARM PRE-ALARM

SYSTEM TROUBLE SUPERVISORY SILENCE 1

SYSTEM ACKNOWLEDGE SYSTEM RESET 2 3 4

Figure 1-13. Module Mounting Dimensions 1-2.10 Network Interface Card

Figure 1-12. RDCM Keypad 1-2.9 ATM Series Driver Modules

B2NA2 B1NA1 B2IA2

R22 R20 R41 U18 1

Q1 1 Q2 1 U6 R18 ASHLAND, MA 01721 C7

Figure 1-14. Network Interface Card

R40 U20 1 U19 1 U21 R44 U14 R17

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM STANDBY BATTERIES

Figure 1-19. Addressable Contact Input Device

ALL TERMINALS ARE POWER LIMITED

PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED (+) (-) (+) (-) A B (+) (-)

Addressable Relay Output Device

LOOP ISOLATOR RX/TX

Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

REFER TO INSTALLATION MANUAL P/N 76-100016-001 FOR MODULE INSTALL. PROCEDURES

Figure 1-21. Air Duct Housing 1-2.17 Loop Isolator Devices

Figure 1-22. Loop Isolator, Stand-Alone

PC PC PC PC (+) (-) (+) (-)

Figure 1-23. Loop Isolator, RX/TX Mount

Figure 1-25. PALM Interface Module for ORION XT HSSD